2010 Chevrolet Aveo Owner Manual M

2010 Chevrolet Aveo Owner Manual M
2010 Chevrolet Aveo Owner Manual M
In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Performance and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Seats and Restraint System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
Restraint System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72
Features and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Doors and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-12
3-14
3-17
3-34
3-36
3-37
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Instrument Panel Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Indicators . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Audio System(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Driving Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Your Driving, the Road, and the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
2010 Chevrolet Aveo Owner Manual M
Service and Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Checking Things Under the Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-79
Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-86
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-86
Capacities and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-93
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Customer Assistance Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Customer Assistance and Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1
Canadian Owners
Propriétaires Canadiens
A French language copy of this manual can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer or from:
On peut obtenir un exemplaire de ce guide en français
auprès du concessionnaire ou à l'adresse suivante:
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,
CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem, and the
name AVEO are registered trademarks of General
Motors.
This manual describes features that may or may not
be on your specific vehicle either because they are
options that you did not purchase or due to changes
subsequent to the printing of this owner manual. Please
refer to the purchase documentation relating to your
specific vehicle to confirm each of the features found
on your vehicle. For vehicles first sold in Canada,
substitute the name “General Motors of Canada
Limited” for Chevrolet Motor Division wherever it
appears in this manual.
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
1-800-551-4123
Numéro de poste 6438 de langue française
www.helminc.com
Index
To quickly locate information about the vehicle, use the
index in the back of the manual. It is an alphabetical list
of what is in the manual and the page number where it
can be found.
Keep this manual in the vehicle for quick reference.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 20858877 B Second Printing
©
2009 General Motors. All Rights Reserved.
iii
Safety Warnings and Symbols
A circle with a slash
through it is a safety
symbol which means
“Do Not,” “Do not do
this,” or “Do not let this
happen.”
Warning messages found on vehicle labels and in this
manual describe hazards and what to do to avoid or
reduce them.
Danger indicates a hazard with a high level of risk
which will result in serious injury or death.
Warning or Caution indicates a hazard that could result
in injury or death.
{ WARNING:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
Notice: This means there is something that could
result in property or vehicle damage. This would not
be covered by the vehicle's warranty.
iv
Vehicle Symbols
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or information relating
to a specific component, control, message, gauge,
or indicator.
M:
This symbol is shown when you need to see your
owner manual for additional instructions or information.
*:
This symbol is shown when you need to see a
service manual for additional instructions or information.
Vehicle Symbol Chart
Here are some additional symbols that may be found on
the vehicle and what they mean. For more information
on the symbol, refer to the index.
9 : Airbag Readiness Light
# : Air Conditioning
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)
g : Audio Steering Wheel Controls or OnStar®
$ : Brake System Warning Light
" : Charging System
I : Cruise Control
B : Engine Coolant Temperature
O : Exterior Lamps
# : Fog Lamps
. : Fuel Gauge
+ : Fuses
i : Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
j : LATCH System Child Restraints
* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp
: : Oil Pressure
} : Power
/ : Remote Vehicle Start
> : Safety Belt Reminders
7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
F : Traction Control
M : Windshield Washer Fluid
v
2 NOTES
vi
Section 1
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Sensing System for Passenger Airbag . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
In Brief
Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Performance and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving for Better Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Roadside Assistance Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-18
1-18
1-19
1-19
1-20
1-20
1-21
1-21
1-22
1-22
1-22
1-23
1-24
1-25
1-25
1-26
1-1
Instrument Panel
1-2
A. Outlet Adjustment on page 4‑19.
B. Instrument Panel Cluster on page 4‑22.
C. Clock on page 4‑15.
D. Hood Release on page 6‑12.
E. Horn on page 4‑3.
F. Audio System(s) on page 4‑39.
G. Climate Control System on page 4‑16.
H. Ashtray. See Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter on
page 4‑15.
I. Cupholders on page 3‑36.
J. Cigarette Lighter. See Ashtray(s) and Cigarette
Lighter on page 4‑15.
K. Hazard Warning Flashers on page 4‑3.
L. Glove Box on page 3‑36.
Initial Drive Information
This section provides a brief overview about some of
the important features that may or may not be on your
specific vehicle.
For more detailed information, refer to each of the
features which can be found later in this owner manual.
Starting the Engine
The vehicle has a Computer-Controlled Cranking
System. It assists in starting the engine and protects
components. If the ignition key is turned to START
and then released when the engine begins cranking,
the engine will continue cranking for a few seconds
or until the engine starts. If the engine does not start
and the key is held in START, cranking will be stopped
after 15 seconds to prevent damage. To prevent gear
damage, cranking is not allowed if the engine is
running. Engine cranking can be stopped by turning
the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF.
See Starting the Engine on page 3‑19.
1-3
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
The RKE transmitter is used to remotely lock and
unlock the doors from up to 20 m (65 feet) away from
the vehicle.
Press 3 to sound the panic alarm on the hatchback
model. Press any of the buttons on the transmitter to
turn off the alarm.
The LED light (A) on the transmitter flashes when the
buttons on the transmitter are pressed. If the light does
not flash the transmitter battery needs to be replaced.
See Keys on page 3‑2 and Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 3‑4.
Door Locks
From the outside, lock or unlock the door using the key
or the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
From the inside, all of the doors can be locked and
unlocked by pushing or pulling the manual door lock on
each door.
Hatchback
Sedan
K to unlock all of the doors.
Press Q to lock all of the doors.
Press V and hold for approximately one second to
Press
open the trunk on the sedan model.
1-4
On vehicles equipped with the central door unlocking
system, lock or unlock all the doors from the inside
using the driver door lock switch.
For more information see:
.
Door Locks on page 3‑6.
.
Central Door Unlocking System on page 3‑7.
Liftgate
To unlock the liftgate on the hatchback model from
outside the vehicle, use the key in the lock cylinder or
use the RKE transmitter, if equipped.
The liftgate can also be locked or unlocked by the
central door unlocking system.
For more information see Liftgate (Hatchback) on
page 3‑10.
Trunk Release
The vehicle may have a
release button located on
the driver door. Press it to
open the trunk.
The handle is located above the right side of the license
plate. Pull the handle toward you and raise the liftgate.
To lock the liftgate, use the key or the RKE transmitter,
if equipped.
1-5
The vehicle may have
a trunk release lever
located on the outboard
side of the driver seat.
Pull the lever to open the
trunk.
Power Windows
For more information see Trunk on page 3‑8.
Windows
Manual Windows
Use the window crank to open and close each window.
The rear windows do not open fully.
For more information see Manual Windows on
page 3‑13.
On vehicles with power windows, the switches for all
windows are located on the driver door armrest. Each
passenger door has a switch for its own window.
The ignition must be in ON/RUN to use the power
windows. To lower the window, press and hold the
switch. To raise the window, lift up on the switch.
Release the switch when the window reaches the
desired level.
For more information see Power Windows on
page 3‑13.
1-6
Seat Adjustment
Seat Height Adjuster
Manual Seats
1. Lift the bar under the
front of the seat to
unlock it.
Turn the knob located on
the outboard side of the
seat to adjust the height
of the driver seat cushion.
Turn the knob forward to raise the seat and rearward to
lower it.
2. Slide the seat to the desired position and release
the bar.
Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked into
place.
1-7
Manual Lumbar
Reclining Seatbacks
Move the adjustment
lever, located on the
outboard side of the
seatback, up or down to
one of three positions to
increase or decrease the
lumbar support.
The highest position provides the most support and the
lowest position provides the least support.
This lever is located on the outboard side of the front
seats.
1. Lift the recline lever.
2. Move the seatback to the desired position then
release the lever to lock the seatback in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked in place.
See Reclining Seatbacks on page 2‑6.
1-8
Second Row Seats
Safety Belt
The rear seatbacks can be folded down to increase
cargo space.
For detailed instructions see Rear Seat Operation
(Sedan) on page 2‑8 or Rear Seat Operation
(Hatchback) on page 2‑10.
Head Restraint Adjustment
The vehicle's front seats have adjustable head
restraints in the outboard seating positions.
Do not drive until the head restraints for all occupants
are installed and adjusted properly.
For more information see Head Restraints on
page 2‑2.
Refer to the following sections for important information
on how to use safety belts properly.
.
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone on page 2‑14.
.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly on page 2‑19.
.
Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 2‑28.
.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
on page 2‑44.
1-9
Sensing System for Passenger
Airbag
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger frontal airbag and seat‐mounted side
impact airbag (if equipped) under certain conditions.
The driver airbags are not affected by this.
Mirror Adjustment
Exterior Mirrors
Manual Outside Mirrors
The passenger airbag status indicator will be visible,
near the clock, located in the center of the instrument
panel when the vehicle is started.
United States
Canada
See Passenger Sensing System on page 2‑65 for
important information.
The control for the outside manual mirrors are located
next to each mirror.
Manually fold the mirrors inward to prevent damage
when going through an automatic car wash. To fold, pull
the mirror toward the vehicle. Push the mirror outward,
to return to its original position.
1-10
Power Outside Mirrors
For more information, see:
The control is located on
the instrument panel, left
of the steering wheel.
.
Outside Power Mirrors on page 3‑35.
.
Outside Manual Mirrors on page 3‑34.
Interior Mirror
Hold the mirror in the center to move it up or down
and side to side. Adjust the mirror to avoid glare from
the headlamps behind you. Push the tab forward for
daytime use and pull it for nighttime use.
See Manual Rearview Mirror on page 3‑34.
The ignition must be turned to ON/RUN to adjust the
mirrors.
1. Select the mirror by moving the selector switch
to L for the driver side mirror or R for the
passenger side.
2. Press one of the four arrows located on the control
pad to move the mirror to the desired direction.
1-11
Steering Wheel Adjustment
The tilt wheel lever is
located under the steering
column, slightly to the left.
Interior Lighting
Dome Lamp
The vehicle has a dome lamp located in the overhead
console.
Move the switch to the following positions:
ON: The light comes on and stays on.
O : The light comes on when a door is opened. The
light turns off when all the doors are closed.
OFF: The light remains off even when a door is
opened.
To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Pull the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel up or down into a
comfortable position.
3. Pull the lever up to lock the wheel in place.
See Tilt Wheel on page 4‑3.
1-12
Be sure all doors and trunk lid or hatch are completely
closed or the battery may drain.
For more information about interior lighting, see:
.
Dome Lamp on page 4‑13.
Exterior Lighting
;: Turns on the parking lamps, together with the
taillamps, license plate lamp, and instrument panel
lights.
OFF: Turns all the lamps off, except the Daytime
Running Lamps (DRL).
For more information, see:
.
Exterior Lamps on page 4‑11.
.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) on page 4‑12.
.
Fog Lamps on page 4‑12.
Uplevel shown, Base similar
The lever on the left side of the steering column
operates the exterior lamps.
3: Turns on the headlamps and other exterior lamps.
The headlamps automatically turn off when the ignition
key is turned to LOCK/OFF or ACC/ACCESSORY.
1-13
Windshield Wiper/Washer
The lever is located on the right side of the steering
column. The ignition must be turned to ON/RUN to
operate the windshield wipers.
HI: Fast wipes.
LO: Slow wipes.
INT: Move to this position for a delayed wiping cycle.
Turn the band on the windshield wiper toward FAST or
SLOW for a shorter or longer delay between wipes. The
wiper speed can only be adjusted when the lever is in
the INT position.
OFF: Turns the windshield wipers off.
Sedan shown
Misting Function
Move the lever toward INT for a single wiping cycle.
Hold it there until the windshield wipers start; then let
go. For several wipes, hold the band toward INT longer.
Windshield Washer
Pull the windshield washer/wiper lever toward you to
spray washer fluid on the windshield.
Hatchback shown
1-14
See Windshield Wipers on page 4‑6 and
Windshield Washer on page 4‑7. For vehicles
with a Rear Window Wiper/Washer, see Rear Window
Wiper/Washer on page 4‑8.
Climate Controls
For vehicles with these climate control systems, the
heating, cooling, and ventilation can be controlled for
the vehicle.
Climate Control System with Heater Only
Climate Control System with Heater and Air
Conditioning
A. Temperature Control
D. Air Conditioning (A/C)
B. Fan Control
E. Air Recirculation
C. Air Delivery
Mode Control
F. Rear Window
Defogger
A. Temperature Control
D. Rear Window Defogger
B. Fan Control
E. Outside Air/Recirculation
C. Air Delivery Mode
Control
See Climate Control System on page 4‑16.
1-15
Transmission
Automatic Transmission
Hold Mode
If the vehicle's transmission has hold mode, you can
select this mode to allow the automatic transmission to
stay in a specific gear range. Select hold mode to help
the vehicle maintain traction on slippery road surfaces,
such as snow, mud, or ice.
Press the HOLD button on the shift lever console to turn
on hold mode. Press the button again to turn off hold
mode, and return to normal automatic transmission
operation.
1-16
When Hold Mode is selected in D4 (Drive), the
transmission is held in 3 (Third) gear, which locks
out D4 (Drive). This allows for engine braking when
slowing from higher speeds.
Five-Speed Manual Transmission
Up‐Shift Light
Vehicles equipped with
a manual transmission
may have an up-shift light.
This light indicates when
to shift to the next higher
gear for better fuel
economy.
When Hold Mode is selected in 2 (Second), the
transmission will start in 2 (Second) gear instead
of 1 (First), helping to reduce wheel spin when starting
out on slippery surface such as snow, mud or ice.
Since selecting Hold Mode in D4 (Drive) locks the
transmission in 3 (Third), and prevents downshifts
to 2 (Second) or 1 (First), acceleration from a stop
or near stop on dry pavement will be slower than
expected. Hold Mode should not be selected during
these situations.
See Automatic Transmission Operation on page 3‑23.
Cold Weather Shifting
When operating the vehicle in severe cold conditions,
the transmission may be prevented from shifting
into D4 gear until the transmission fluid has warmed
up to it's operational temperature.
For the best fuel economy, accelerate slowly and shift
when the light comes on, if weather, road, and traffic
conditions allow.
It is normal for the light to go on and off if the
accelerator position changes quickly. Ignore the light
during downshifts.
Reverse Lockout
The manual transmission is equipped with a lock
ring to prevent shifting into R (Reverse). To shift into
R (Reverse), press down the clutch pedal, lift up the ring
on the shift lever and shift into R (Reverse). Let up on
the clutch pedal slowly while pressing the accelerator
pedal.
See Manual Transmission Operation on page 3‑26.
1-17
Vehicle Features
Radio(s)
When the system is on, press and release O to mute
the system. Press and release O again to turn the
sound back on.
BAND: Press to choose FM, AM, or XM™
(if equipped).
u SEEK: Press to seek the next radio station with a
strong signal in the selected band.
t SEEK:
Press to seek the previous radio station with
a strong signal in the selected band.
[ TUNE: Press to go to the next station manually.
r TUNE: Press to go to the previous station manually.
SCAN/AST: Press to scan radio stations. Press and
hold to use Auto Store.
Radio with CD shown
O:
Press and release to turn the system on. Press and
hold this knob for more than two seconds to turn the
system off.
Turn to increase or decrease the volume.
1-18
CD/AUX: Press to play a CD when listening to the
radio. CDP appears on the display when the CD player
has been selected. The CD symbol will appear on the
display when a CD is loaded. Press CD/AUX while a
CD is playing to pause the CD. PAUSE flashes on the
display. Press CD/AUX again to start playing the CD.
Press CD/AUX to play a CD when listening to the audio
contents from other device (AUX mode). CDP appears
on the display when the CD player has been selected.
The CD symbol will appear on the display when a CD is
loaded.
Press to play a CD while a portable audio device is
playing. Press CD/AUX a second time for the system to
begin playing audio from the connected portable audio
player. The portable audio device continues playing
until it is turned off.
For more information about these and other radio
features, see Audio System(s) on page 4‑39.
Storing a Favorite Station
A maximum of 36 stations can be programmed as
favorites using the six pushbuttons positioned below
the radio station frequency labels and by using the
radio favorites page button (FAV button). Press the
FAV button to go through up to six pages of favorites,
each having six favorite stations available per page.
If Automatic Store is used, then four pages of favorites
are available. Each page of favorites can contain any
combination of AM, FM, or XM™ (if equipped) stations.
See “Storing a Favorite Station” under AM-FM Radio on
page 4‑40 and Radio with CD on page 4‑45.
Satellite Radio
XM is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian
provinces. XM satellite radio has a wide variety
of programming and commercial-free music,
coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality sound.
A fee is required to receive the XM service.
For more information, refer to:
.
www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-929-2100 (U.S.)
.
www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677 (Canada)
See “XM Satellite Radio Service” under AM-FM Radio
on page 4‑40 and Radio with CD on page 4‑45.
Portable Audio Devices
This vehicle may have a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) auxiliary
input jack, located on the lower right side of the audio
faceplate. External devices such as iPod®, laptop
computers, MP3 players, etc. can be connected to the
3.5 mm (1/8 in) auxiliary input jack using a 3.5 mm
(1/8 in) input jack cable.
See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack” under AM-FM
Radio on page 4‑40 and Radio with CD on page 4‑45.
1-19
Steering Wheel Controls
+ VOLUME − : Press the toggle bar located below
the + VOLUME − to adjust the volume.
MODE: Press and release this button multiple times
to cycle through the audio playback options that are
available on the vehicle.
SEEK: Press and release to go to the next preset
station, or CD track. Press and hold for a long time to
go to the next AM, FM, or XM station, or to fast forward
through CD tracks.
For more information, see Audio Steering Wheel
Controls on page 4‑64.
Front View of the Steering Side View of the Volume
Wheel Controls
Control
If the vehicle has this feature, some audio controls can
be adjusted at the steering wheel.
PWR: Press and release to turn the system on and off.
When the system is on, press and release for a short
time to mute the system. Press and release again to
turn the sound back on.
1-20
Trip Computer
The vehicle may have trip computer, it provides the
driver with driving information such as the driving
distance for the remaining fuel, outside temperature,
average fuel economy, and driving time.
The trip computer button is located in the lower right
area of the tachometer. Each time you press it, the
display cycles through the available choices.
See Trip Computer on page 4‑38.
Cruise Control
Power Outlets
Accessory power outlets can be used to plug in
auxiliary electrical equipment, such as a cellular phone.
The accessory power outlet is located next to the
parking brake on the center console.
To use the accessory power outlet, remove the
protective cap. When not in use, always cover the
outlet with the protective cap.
The accessory power outlet is operational when the
ignition is turned to ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN.
See Accessory Power Outlet(s) on page 4‑14.
The cruise control buttons are located on the right side
of the steering wheel.
I/O:
Press to turn the cruise control on or off.
RES+: Press to make the vehicle accelerate or resume
to a previously set speed.
SET−: Press to set the speed or make the vehicle
decelerate.
See Cruise Control on page 4‑8.
1-21
Sunroof
Performance and Maintenance
On vehicles with this
feature, the switch is
located on the headliner
between the sun visors
and can only be operated
when the ignition is turned
to ON/RUN.
To vent the sunroof, open the sunshade and then press
and hold the driver side switch. To close, press the
passenger side switch.
To fully open the sunroof, press and hold the passenger
side switch. The sunshade will open with the sunroof.
To close, press the driver side switch. Manually close
the sunshade.
For more information see Sunroof on page 3‑37.
1-22
Tire Pressure Monitor
This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS).
The Tire Pressure
Monitor alerts you when
a significant reduction in
pressure occurs in one or
more of the vehicle’s tires
by illuminating the low tire
pressure warning light on
the instrument cluster.
If the warning light comes on, stop as soon as possible
and inflate the tires to the recommended pressure
shown on the tire loading information label located on
the driver side center pillar (B pillar). See Loading the
Vehicle on page 5‑15. The warning light will remain on
until the tire pressure is corrected.
You may notice during cooler conditions that the low tire
pressure warning light will appear when the vehicle is
first started and then turn off as you drive. This may be
an early indicator that your tire pressures are getting
low and the tires need to be inflated to the proper
pressure.
Engine Oil Life System
The Tire Pressure Monitor can alert you about low tire
pressure, but it does not replace normal monthly tire
maintenance. It is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressures.
Resetting the Oil Life System
See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 6‑59 and
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 6‑60.
The engine oil life system calculates engine oil life
based on vehicle use and displays a change engine oil
light when it is necessary to change the engine oil and
filter.
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN, with the engine off.
2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal
three times within five seconds.
3. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.
See Engine Oil Life System on page 6‑18.
1-23
Hood Release
To open the hood:
1. Pull the hood release
handle inside the
vehicle. It is located on
the lower left side of
the instrument panel.
2. At the front of the vehicle, lift up on the secondary
hood release lever, located under the front center
of the vehicle.
3. Lift the hood and securely place the hood prop into
the slot on the inner fender.
See Hood Release on page 6‑12.
1-24
Driving for Better Fuel Economy
Roadside Assistance Program
Driving habits can affect fuel mileage. Here are some
driving tips to get the best fuel economy possible.
U.S.: 1-800-CHEV-USA (1-800-243-8872)
.
Avoid fast starts and accelerate smoothly.
.
Brake gradually and avoid abrupt stops.
.
Avoid idling the engine for long periods of time.
.
When road and weather conditions are
appropriate, use cruise control, if equipped.
.
Always follow posted speed limits or drive more
slowly when conditions require.
.
Keep vehicle tires properly inflated.
.
Combine several trips into a single trip.
.
Replace the vehicle's tires with the same TPC
Spec number molded into the tire's sidewall near
the size.
.
Follow recommended scheduled maintenance.
TTY Users: 1-888-889-2438
Canada: 1-800-268-6800
As the owner of a new Chevrolet, you are automatically
enrolled in the Roadside Assistance program. This
program provides technically trained advisors who are
available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year, minor repair
information or towing arrangements.
Roadside Assistance and OnStar
If you have a current OnStar subscription, press the
OnStar button and the current GPS location will be sent
to an OnStar Advisor who will assess your problem,
contact Roadside Assistance, and relay exact location
to get you the help you need.
Online Owner Center
The Online Owner Center is a complimentary service
that includes online service reminders, vehicle
maintenance tips, online owner manual, special
privileges and more.
Sign up today at: www.gmownercenter.com/chevrolet
(U.S.) or www.gm.ca (Canada).
1-25
OnStar®
OnStar® uses several innovative technologies and live
advisors to provide a wide range of safety, security,
navigation, diagnostics, and calling services.
Automatic Crash Response
In a crash, built in sensors can automatically alert an
OnStar advisor who is immediately connected to the
vehicle to see if you need help.
How OnStar Service Works
Q : This blue button connects you to a specially
trained OnStar advisor to verify your account
information and to answer questions.
] : Push this red emergency button to get priority help
from specially trained OnStar emergency advisors.
X:
Push this button for hands‐free, voice‐activated
calling and to give voice commands for turn‐by‐turn
navigation.
1-26
Crisis Assist, Stolen Vehicle Assistance, Vehicle
Diagnostics, Remote Door Unlock, Roadside
Assistance, Turn‐by‐Turn Navigation and Hands‐Free
Calling are available on most vehicles. Not all OnStar
services are available on all vehicles. For more
information see the OnStar Owner's Guide or visit
www.onstar.com (U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada),
contact OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1‐888‐466‐7827)
or TTY 1‐877‐248‐2080, or press Q to speak with an
OnStar advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
For a full description of OnStar services and system
limitations, see the OnStar Owner's Guide in the
glove box.
OnStar service is subject to the OnStar terms and
conditions included in the OnStar Subscriber
Information.
OnStar service cannot work unless the vehicle is in a
place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless
service provider for service in that area. OnStar service
also cannot work unless the vehicle is in a place where
the wireless service provider OnStar has hired for that
area has coverage, network capacity and reception
when the service is needed, and technology that is
compatible with the OnStar service. Not all services are
available everywhere, particularly in remote or enclosed
areas, or at all times.
The OnStar system can record and transmit vehicle
information. This information is automatically sent to an
OnStar call center when Q is pressed, ] is pressed,
or if the airbags or ACR system deploy. This information
usually includes the vehicle's GPS location and, in the
event of a crash, additional information regarding the
crash that the vehicle was involved in (e.g. the direction
from which the vehicle was hit). When the virtual
advisor feature of OnStar hands-free calling is used, the
vehicle also sends OnStar the vehicle's GPS location
so they can provide services where it is located.
Your Responsibility
Increase the volume of the radio if the OnStar advisor
cannot be heard.
If the light next to the OnStar buttons is red, the system
may not be functioning properly. Press Q and request a
vehicle diagnostic. If the light appears clear (no light is
appearing), your OnStar subscription has expired and
all services have been deactivated. Press Q to confirm
that the OnStar equipment is active.
Location information about the vehicle is only available
if the GPS satellite signals are unobstructed and
available.
The vehicle must have a working electrical system,
including adequate battery power, for the OnStar
equipment to operate. There are other problems OnStar
cannot control that may prevent OnStar from providing
OnStar service at any particular time or place. Some
examples are damage to important parts of the vehicle
in a crash, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather or
wireless phone network congestion.
1-27
2 NOTES
1-28
Section 2
Seats and Restraint System
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Manual Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Seat Height Adjuster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Manual Lumbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Rear Seat Operation (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Rear Seat Operation (Hatchback) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Infants and Young Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Child Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Where to Put the Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat
Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
When Should an Airbag Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How Does an Airbag Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? . . .
Passenger Sensing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . . .
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restraint System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking the Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing Restraint System Parts After a
Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-44
2-51
2-53
2-58
2-60
2-62
2-63
2-63
2-64
2-65
2-70
2-71
2-72
2-72
2-73
2-1
Head Restraints
The front seats have adjustable head restraints in the
outboard seating positions.
{ WARNING:
With head restraints that are not installed and
adjusted properly, there is a greater chance that
occupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a
crash. Do not drive until the head restraints for all
occupants are installed and adjusted properly.
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is at the same height as the top of the occupant's head.
This position reduces the chances of a neck injury in a
crash.
2-2
Push down on the head restraint after the button is
released to make sure that it is locked in place.
The head restraints are not designed to be removed.
The rear seats have head rests that are adjustable up
and down.
Pull the head restraint up to raise it. To lower the head
restraint, press the button, located on the top of the
seatback, and push the restraint down.
2-3
Front Seats
Manual Seats
{ WARNING:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver's seat while the vehicle is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you
do not want to. Adjust the driver's seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
1. Lift the bar under the front of the seat to unlock it.
2. Slide the seat to the desired position and release
the bar.
3. Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked
into place.
2-4
Seat Height Adjuster
Manual Lumbar
Turn the knob, located on
the outboard side of the
seat, to adjust the height
of the driver seat.
On vehicles with front
seat manual lumbar,
the adjustment lever is
located on the outboard
side of the seatback.
Turn the knob forward to raise the seat and rearward to
lower it.
Move the lever up or down to one of three positions to
increase or decrease lumbar support.
The highest position provides the most support and the
lowest position provides the least support.
2-5
Reclining Seatbacks
{ WARNING:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver's seat while the vehicle is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you
do not want to. Adjust the driver's seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
{ WARNING:
If either seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
are locked.
To recline the seatback:
1. Lift the recline lever.
2. Move the seatback to the desired position, then
release the lever to lock the seatback in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked in place.
To return the seatback to an upright position:
The seats have manual reclining seatbacks. The lever
is located on the outboard side of the seats.
1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the
seatback and the seatback will return to the upright
position.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
2-6
{ WARNING:
Sitting in a reclined position when the vehicle is in
motion can be dangerous. Even when buckled up,
the safety belts cannot do their job when reclined
like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job because it will
not be against your body. Instead, it will be in front
of you. In a crash, you could go into it, receiving
neck or other injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash,
the belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt
forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones.
This could cause serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well
back in the seat and wear the safety belt properly.
Do not have a seatback reclined if the vehicle is
moving.
2-7
Rear Seats
Rear Seat Operation (Sedan)
Folding the Seatbacks
The rear seatbacks can be folded down to increase
cargo space.
To fold down the seatbacks:
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts and
return them to their normal stowed position before
folding a rear seat.
1. Remove the safety belt strap from the safety belt
guide by pulling it through the slot.
2. Push the head restraints all the way down.
3. Unlatch the center safety belt by pressing the red
button on the buckle.
2-8
4. Detach the center safety belt from the mini buckle
by inserting the ignition key into the slot in the mini
buckle, pressing the release button, and allowing
the belt to retract.
5. Pull up the release knob located on top of either of
the rear seatbacks.
6. Fold the rear seatback forward and down.
2-9
Unfolding the Seatbacks
To return the seatback to the upright position:
{ WARNING:
1. Hook the safety belts into the safety belt guide.
2. Lift the seatback up and push it to its original
position.
{ WARNING:
If either seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
are locked.
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not provide the
protection needed in a crash. The person wearing
the belt could be seriously injured. After raising
the rear seatback, always check to be sure that
the safety belts are properly routed and attached,
and are not twisted.
6. Insert the safety belt strap back into the safety belt
guide.
Rear Seat Operation (Hatchback)
3. Push down and rearward firmly on the top of the
seatbacks until it latches securely in the fully
upright position.
Folding the Rear Seats
4. To reattach the center seat safety belt to the mini
buckle, pull it from the retractor.
To fold the rear seats:
5. Push the latch plate at the end of the safety belt
strap into the mini-buckle until the mechanism
clicks. Make sure the strap is not twisted. The
sliding latch plate will face the front of the vehicle.
2-10
The rear seats can be folded to increase cargo space.
1. Lower the head restraints completely.
2. Unlatch the center safety belt by pressing the red
button on the buckle.
3. Detach the center safety belt from the mini buckle
by inserting the key into the slot in the mini buckle,
pressing the release button, and allowing it to
retract.
4. Pull up the release knob, located on the top of
the seatbacks, and fold the seatbacks forward
and down.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts and
return them to their normal stowed position before
folding a rear seat.
5. Move the safety belt buckles and safety belt in the
center seating position out of the space between
the seatbacks and the seat cushion so they are not
in the way as the seat is being folded.
2-11
6. Firmly pull the release handles on the rear side of
the seat cushion to unlock the seat cushion.
7. Lift the seat cushion up and flip it forward.
8. Clip the hook to the front seat head restraint to
keep the rear seat secure.
Unfolding the Seats
To return the rear seats to the normal seating position:
1. Unclip the hook from the front seat head restraint.
2. Position the buckles in back of the seat latches
when moving the rear seats to the sitting position.
2-12
Notice: Damage to the safety belt buckle or rear
seat locking mechanism can occur if the safety
belt and buckles are pinched under the rear seat
cushion. Do not place the safety belt and buckles
on the floor under the rear seat cushion when the
rear seat is put back to the sitting position.
3. Push the seat cushion down to its original position
until it latches securely. Try to pull up on the seat
to make sure it is locked in place.
{ WARNING:
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not provide the
protection needed in a crash. The person wearing
the belt could be seriously injured. After raising
the rear seatback, always check to be sure that
the safety belts are properly routed and attached,
and are not twisted.
5. Lift the seatbacks up and push them back to their
original latched positions.
6. Unhook the safety belts in the outboard seating
positions from the retaining clips.
4. Hook the safety belts in the outboard seating
positions into the retaining clips.
2-13
7. Return the safety belt buckles and the center seat
safety belt to their original position between the
rear seatback and the seat cushion. Make sure
the straps of the safety belt and buckles are not
twisted.
8. To reattach the center seat safety belt to the mini
buckle, pull it from the retractor.
Safety Belts
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
This section of the manual describes how to use safety
belts properly. It also describes some things not to do
with safety belts.
{ WARNING:
{ WARNING:
If either seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
are locked.
Do not let anyone ride where a safety belt
cannot be worn properly. In a crash, if you or
your passenger(s) are not wearing safety belts,
the injuries can be much worse. You can hit things
inside the vehicle harder or be ejected from
the vehicle. You and your passenger(s) can be
seriously injured or killed. In the same crash, you
might not be, if you are buckled up. Always fasten
your safety belt, and check that your passenger(s)
are restrained properly too.
9. Push down and rearward firmly on the top of the
seatbacks until they latch securely in the fully
upright position.
2-14
{ WARNING:
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely to
be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people
to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a
safety belt properly.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter ... a lot!
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
This vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle the
safety belts. See Safety Belt Reminders on page 4‑24
for additional information.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
requires wearing safety belts. Here is why:
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be
so serious that even buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of
them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes
walk away. Without safety belts, they could have been
badly hurt or killed.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat on
wheels.
2-15
Put someone on it.
2-16
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
does not stop.
The person keeps going until stopped by something. In
a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
or the instrument panel...
2-17
Questions and Answers About Safety
Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if I
am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But your chance of being conscious
during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle
and get out, is much greater if you are belted. And
you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you are
upside down.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.
2-18
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so they
work with safety belts — not instead of them.
Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants
still have to buckle up to get the most protection.
That is true not only in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other collisions.
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in a
crash — even one that is not your fault — you and
your passenger(s) can be hurt. Being a good driver
does not protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest number of serious injuries
and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph
(65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This section is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different rules
for smaller children and infants. If a child will be riding in
the vehicle, see Older Children on page 2‑32 or Infants
and Young Children on page 2‑35. Follow those rules
for everyone's protection.
It is very important for all occupants to buckle up.
Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out of
the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others in the
vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
First, before you or your passenger(s) wear a safety
belt, there is important information you should know.
2-19
In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones
and you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt.
If you slid under it, the belt would apply force on your
abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder
and across the chest. These parts of the body are best
able to take belt restraining forces.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or
crash.
Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor
in front of you. The lap part of the belt should be worn
low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs.
2-20
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ WARNING:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too
much, which could increase injury. The shoulder
belt should fit snugly against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give as
much protection this way.
2-21
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ WARNING:
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is too
loose. In a crash, you could slide under the lap
belt and apply force on your abdomen. This could
cause serious or even fatal injuries. The lap belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly as
much protection this way.
2-22
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ WARNING:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled
in the wrong place like this. In a crash, the belt
would go up over your abdomen. The belt forces
would be there, not on the pelvic bones. This
could cause serious internal injuries. Always
buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong buckle.
2-23
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ WARNING:
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes over
an armrest like this. The belt would be much too
high. In a crash, you can slide under the belt. The
belt force would then be applied on the abdomen,
not on the pelvic bones, and that could cause
serious or fatal injuries. Be sure the belt goes
under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.
2-24
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ WARNING:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to the
ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder bones.
You could also severely injure internal organs like
your liver or spleen. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
2-25
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ WARNING:
You can be seriously injured by not wearing the
lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, you would
not be restrained by the shoulder belt. Your body
could move too far forward increasing the chance
of head and neck injury. You might also slide
under the lap belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across the chest.
A: The belt is behind the body.
2-26
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ WARNING:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In a
crash, you would not have the full width of the belt
to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted, make
it straight so it can work properly, or ask your
dealer/retailer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
2-27
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in the vehicle have a
lap-shoulder belt.
If you are using a rear seating position with a
detachable safety belt and the safety belt is not
attached, see Rear Seat Operation (Sedan) on
page 2‑8 or Rear Seat Operation (Hatchback) on
page 2‑10 for instruction on reconnecting the safety
belt to the mini-buckle.
The following instructions explain how to wear a
lap-shoulder belt properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you
can sit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in the
Index.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the
belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
If the shoulder portion of a passenger belt is pulled
out all the way, the child restraint locking feature
may be engaged. If this happens, let the belt go
back all the way and start again.
2-28
3. If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle, tilt the
latch plate and keep pulling until it can be buckled.
5. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster,
move it to the height that is right for you. See
“Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment” later in this
section for instructions on use and important safety
information.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
If the latch plate will not go fully into the buckle,
check if the correct buckle is being used.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 2‑32.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety
belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the lap
belt on smaller occupants.
2-29
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
The vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for the
driver and right front passenger seating positions.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt
is centered on the shoulder. The belt should be away
from the face and neck, but not falling off the shoulder.
Improper shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce
the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
To move it down, press
the release button (A) and
move the height adjuster
to the desired position.
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle. The
belt should return to its stowed position.
Before a door is closed, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If a door is slammed against a safety belt, damage
can occur to both the safety belt and the vehicle.
After the adjuster is set to the desired position, try to
move it down without pressing the release button to
make sure it has locked into position.
2-30
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
This vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for front
outboard occupants. Although the safety belt
pretensioners cannot be seen, they are part of the
safety belt assembly. They can help tighten the safety
belts during the early stages of a moderate to severe
frontal or near frontal crash if the threshold conditions
for pretensioner activation are met.
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
Pretensioners work only once. If the pretensioners
activate in a crash, they will need to be replaced, and
probably other new parts for the vehicle's safety belt
system. See Replacing Restraint System Parts After a
Crash on page 2‑73.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt,
and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more
likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
2-31
Safety Belt Extender
Child Restraints
If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
Older Children
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer/
retailer will order you an extender. When you go in to
order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the
extender will be long enough for you. To help avoid
personal injury, do not let someone else use it, and use
it only for the seat it is made to fit. The extender has
been designed for adults. Never use it for securing child
seats. To wear it, attach it to the regular safety belt. For
more information, see the instruction sheet that comes
with the extender.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle's safety belts.
The manufacturer's instructions that come with the
booster seat, state the weight and height limitations for
that booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder belt
until the child passes the below fit test:
.
2-32
Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees
bend at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
.
.
.
Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder
belt rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no,
then return to the booster seat.
Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips,
touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return
to the booster seat.
Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for the
length of the trip? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.
{ WARNING:
Never do this.
Never allow two children to wear the same safety
belt. The safety belt can not properly spread the
impact forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A safety
belt must be used by only one person at a time.
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can
provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face
or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the
hips, just touching the top of the thighs. This applies
belt force to the child's pelvic bones in a crash.
It should never be worn over the abdomen, which
could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in
a crash.
According to accident statistics, children and infants
are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seating positions.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown out
of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety belts
properly.
2-33
{ WARNING:
Never do this.
Never allow a child to wear the safety belt with the
shoulder belt behind their back. A child can be
seriously injured by not wearing the lap-shoulder
belt properly. In a crash, the child would not be
restrained by the shoulder belt. The child could
move too far forward increasing the chance of
head and neck injury. The child might also slide
under the lap belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across the chest.
2-34
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in every
Canadian province says children up to some age must
be restrained while in a vehicle.
{ WARNING:
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a
shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to tighten. Never leave
children unattended in a vehicle and never allow
children to play with the safety belts.
Airbags plus lap‐shoulder belts offer protection for
adults and older children, but not for young children and
infants. Neither the vehicle's safety belt system nor its
airbag system is designed for them. Every time infants
and young children ride in vehicles, they should have
the protection provided by appropriate child restraints.
Children who are not restrained properly can strike
other people, or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
2-35
{ WARNING:
Never do this.
Never hold an infant or a child while riding in a
vehicle. Due to crash forces, an infant or a child
will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it
during a crash. For example, in a crash at only
40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb) infant will
suddenly become a 110 kg (240 lb) force on a
person's arms. An infant should be secured in an
appropriate restraint.
2-36
{ WARNING:
Never do this.
Children who are up against, or very close to, any
airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or
killed. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in
the right front seat. Secure a rear-facing child
restraint in a rear seat. It is also better to secure a
forward-facing child restraint in a rear seat. If you
must secure a forward-facing child restraint in the
right front seat, always move the front passenger
seat as far back as it will go.
2-37
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle's owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take into
consideration not only the child's weight, height,
and age but also whether or not the restraint will be
compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used in a
motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a label
saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety
standards.
The restraint manufacturer's instructions that
come with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
2-38
{ WARNING:
To reduce the risk of neck and head injury during
a crash, infants need complete support. This is
because an infant's neck is not fully developed
and its head weighs so much compared with
the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a
rear-facing child restraint settles into the restraint,
so the crash forces can be distributed across the
strongest part of an infant's body, the back and
shoulders. Infants should always be secured in
rear-facing child restraints.
{ WARNING:
A young child's hip bones are still so small that
the vehicle's regular safety belt may not remain
low on the hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may
settle up around the child's abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. To reduce
the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash,
young children should always be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
Child Restraint Systems
A rear-facing infant
seat (A) provides restraint
with the seating surface
against the back of the
infant.
The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a
crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
A forward-facing child
seat (B) provides restraint
for the child's body with
the harness.
2-39
Securing an Add-On Child Restraint in
the Vehicle
{ WARNING:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash
if the child restraint is not properly secured in the
vehicle. Secure the child restraint properly in the
vehicle using the vehicle's safety belt or LATCH
system, following the instructions that came with
that child restraint and the instructions in this
manual.
A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle's safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the
window.
2-40
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint
must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint
systems must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts
or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the
LATCH system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH) on page 2‑44 for more information.
A child can be endangered in a crash if the child
restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be
on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important,
so if they are not available, obtain a replacement copy
from the manufacturer.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any
child restraint in the vehicle — even when no child is
in it.
Securing the Child Within the Child
Restraint
{ WARNING:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash
if the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint. Secure the child properly following the
instructions that came with that child restraint.
2-41
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
We recommend that children and child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a child
riding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding in a
forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in a
booster seat; and children, who are large enough, using
safety belts.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{ WARNING:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag
inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward
position.
(Continued)
2-42
WARNING: (Continued)
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that
an airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 2‑65
for additional information.
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with your
child restraint to make sure it is compatible with this
vehicle.
There are a couple of things you need to know about
using child restraints in your rear seat:
If you use a child
restraint in the center
rear seating position (A),
the safety belts and the
child restraint LATCH
anchors for the rear
outside seating
positions (B) will not
be accessible.
Therefore, you will not be able to secure a child
restraint or have a passenger ride in the center rear
seating position.
Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure to secure
the child restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any
child restraint in your vehicle — even when no child is
in it.
Therefore, you will not be able to secure child restraints
or have passengers ride in the rear outside seating
positions.
If you use two child
restraints (A) in the
rear outside seating
positions, the safety belt
for the center rear seat
position (B) will not be
accessible.
2-43
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
Lower Anchors
The LATCH system holds a child restraint during
driving or in a crash. This system is designed to make
installation of a child restraint easier. The LATCH
system uses anchors in the vehicle and attachments on
the child restraint that are made for use with the LATCH
system.
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint
is properly installed using the anchors, or use the
vehicle's safety belts to secure the restraint, following
the instructions that came with that restraint, and also
the instructions in this manual. When installing a child
restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the
lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure the
child restraint. A child restraint must never be installed
using only the top tether and anchor.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you
need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments.
The child restraint manufacturer will provide you with
instructions on how to use the child restraint and its
attachments. The following explains how to attach a
child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle.
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have
lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors
and attachments.
2-44
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.
There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating
position that will accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).
Top Tether Anchor
Some child restraints that have a top tether are
designed for use with or without the top tether being
attached. Others require the top tether always to
be attached. In Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have a top tether, and
that the tether be attached. Be sure to read and follow
the instructions for your child restraint.
If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints. Ask
the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit is
available.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
i (Top Tether Anchor):
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint
to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the
vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the child
restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle
in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation of
the child restraint during driving or in a crash.
Seating positions with top
tether anchors.
j (Lower Anchor):
Seating positions with
two lower anchors.
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a
dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)
to secure the top tether to the anchor.
2-45
To assist you in locating
the lower anchors, each
seating position with lower
anchors has two labels,
near the crease between
the seatback and the seat
cushion.
Hatchback models may have zippers over the lower
anchor areas. If so, unzip the seat cover below the
labels to access each lower anchor.
To assist you in locating
the top tether anchors, the
top tether anchor symbol
is located on the cover.
2-46
Sedan
For sedan models, the top tether anchors are located
under the covers behind the rear seat on the filler panel.
Pull open the cover to access the top tether anchors.
Be sure to use an anchor located on the same side of
the vehicle as the seating position where the child
restraint will be placed.
The cargo shade should remain off while the top tether
is in use. Be sure to use an anchor located on the same
side of the vehicle as the seating position where the
child restraint will be placed.
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top tether must
be attached.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. See
Where to Put the Restraint on page 2‑42 for additional
information.
Hatchback
For hatchback models, the top tether anchors (B) are
located in the rear cargo area, attached to the back
wall (A) of the vehicle. Squeeze and pull the front part
of the plastic cover to access the top tether anchors.
Remove the cargo shade before installing the top tether.
2-47
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCH System
{ WARNING:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached to
anchors, the child restraint will not be able to
protect the child correctly. In a crash, the child
could be seriously injured or killed. Install a
LATCH-type child restraint properly using the
anchors, or use the vehicle's safety belts to
secure the restraint, following the instructions that
came with the child restraint and the instructions
in this manual.
{ WARNING:
Do not attach more than one child restraint to a
single anchor. Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could cause the
anchor or attachment to come loose or even
break during a crash. A child or others could be
injured. To reduce the risk of serious or fatal
injuries during a crash, attach only one child
restraint per anchor.
{ WARNING:
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a
shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to tighten. Buckle any
unused safety belts behind the child restraint so
children cannot reach them. Pull the shoulder
belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock,
if your vehicle has one, after the child restraint
has been installed.
2-48
Notice: Do not let the LATCH attachments rub
against the vehicle’s safety belts. This may damage
these parts. If necessary, move buckled safety belts
to avoid rubbing the LATCH attachments.
Do not fold the empty rear seat with a safety belt
buckled. This could damage the safety belt or the
seat. Unbuckle and return the safety belt to its
stowed position, before folding the seat.
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the
lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have
lower attachments or the desired seating position
does not have lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and the safety belts.
Refer to your child restraint manufacturer
instructions and the instructions in this manual.
1. 1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that
the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the
top tether to the top tether anchor, if equipped.
Refer to the child restraint instructions and the
following steps:
2. 1. Find the top tether anchor.
2. 2. Flip the cover to access the top tether
anchors.
2. 3. For hatchback models, remove the cargo
shade before installing the top tether. The
cargo shade should remain off while the top
tether is in use.
2. 4. Raise the headrest or head restraint if the
desired seating position has an adjustable
headrest or head restraint. See Head
Restraints on page 2‑2.
1. 2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1. 3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on
the child restraint to the lower anchors.
2-49
2. 5. Route and tighten the top tether according
to your child restraint instructions and the
following instructions:
If the position you are
using does not have a
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
single tether, route the
tether over the seatback.
If the position you are
using does not have a
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a dual
tether, route the tether
over the seatback.
If the position you are
using has a headrest or
head restraint and you
are using a dual tether,
route the tether under
the headrest or head
restraint and in between
the headrest or head
restraint posts.
If the position you are
using has an adjustable
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
single tether, route the
tether under the headrest
or head restraint and in
between the headrest or
head restraint posts.
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
2-50
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with your child
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH
system, you will be using the safety belt to secure
the child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow
the instructions that came with the child restraint.
Secure the child in the child restraint when and as
the instructions say.
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on
page 2‑44 for how to install your child restraint using
LATCH. If you secure a child restraint using a safety
belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 2‑44 for top
tether anchor locations.
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top strap must
be anchored.
If you need to install more than one child restraint in the
rear seat, be sure to read Where to Put the Restraint on
page 2‑42.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and
shoulder portions of the vehicle's safety belt
through or around the restraint. The child restraint
instructions will show you how.
2-51
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
If you find that the latch plate will not go fully into
the buckle, see if you are using the correct buckle.
Make sure the release button is positioned so you
would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if
necessary.
2-52
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
6. If your child restraint has a top tether, follow the
child restraint manufacturer's instructions regarding
the use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 2‑44.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. If the top tether
is attached to a top tether anchor, disconnect it.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child
restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt to
tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the
shoulder belt back into the retractor. If you are
using a forward-facing child restraint, you may find
it helpful to use your knee to push down on the
child restraint as you tighten the belt.
This vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to
secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to
Put the Restraint on page 2‑42.
In addition, the vehicle has a passenger sensing system
which is designed to turn off the right front passenger
frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag
(if equipped) under certain conditions. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 2‑65 and Passenger Airbag
Status Indicator on page 4‑26 for more information on
this, including important safety information.
2-53
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{ WARNING:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag
inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward
position.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that
an airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off.
(Continued)
2-54
WARNING: (Continued)
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 2‑65
for additional information.
If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on
page 2‑44 for how to install your child restraint using
LATCH. If a child restraint is secured using a safety
belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 2‑44 for top
tether anchor locations.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come
with the child restraint say that the top strap must be
anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before
securing the forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped),
the off indicator on the passenger airbag status
indicator should light and stay lit when you start the
vehicle. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on
page 4‑26.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
Tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and
shoulder portions of the vehicle's safety belt
through or around the restraint. The child restraint
instructions will show you how.
2-55
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
2-56
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
If the airbag or airbags are off, the off indicator in the
passenger airbag status indicator will come on and stay
on when the vehicle is started.
If a child restraint has been installed and the off symbol
is not lit, see “If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child
Restraint” under Passenger Sensing System on
page 2‑65 for more information.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle's
safety belt and let it go back all the way.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child
restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt to
tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the
shoulder belt back into the retractor. If you are
using a forward-facing child restraint, you may find
it helpful to use your knee to push down on the
child restraint as you tighten the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
2-57
Airbag System
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
The vehicle has the following airbags:
.
A frontal airbag for the driver.
.
A frontal airbag for the right front passenger.
The vehicle may have the following airbags:
.
A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the driver.
.
A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the right
front passenger.
All of the airbags in your vehicle will have the word
AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label
near the deployment opening.
For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on the
middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and on
the instrument panel for the right front passenger.
With seat-mounted side impact airbags, the word
AIRBAG will appear on the side of the seatback closest
to the door.
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Even though today's airbags
are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury from
the force of an inflating bag, all airbags must inflate very
quickly to do their job.
2-58
{ WARNING:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you are not wearing your safety belt — even if
you have airbags. Airbags are designed to work
with safety belts, but do not replace them. Also,
airbags are not designed to deploy in every
crash. In some crashes safety belts are your
only restraint. See When Should an Airbag
Inflate? on page 2‑62.
Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps
reduce your chance of hitting things inside the
vehicle or being ejected from it. Airbags are
“supplemental restraints” to the safety belts.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an airbag
for that person.
{ WARNING:
WARNING: (Continued)
Airbags inflate with great force, faster than the
blink of an eye. Anyone who is up against, or
very close to, any airbag when it inflates can be
seriously injured or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily
close to the airbag, as you would be if you were
sitting on the edge of your seat or leaning forward.
Safety belts help keep you in position before and
during a crash. Always wear your safety belt,
even with airbags. The driver should sit as far
back as possible while still maintaining control of
the vehicle.
offer protection for adults and older children, but
not for young children and infants. Neither the
vehicle's safety belt system nor its airbag system
is designed for them. Young children and infants
need the protection that a child restraint system
can provide. Always secure children properly in
your vehicle. To read how, see Older Children on
page 2‑32 or Infants and Young Children on
page 2‑35.
Occupants should not lean on or sleep against
the door or side windows in seating positions with
seat-mounted airbags.
There is an airbag
readiness light on the
instrument panel, which
shows the airbag symbol.
{ WARNING:
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts
(Continued)
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4‑25 for
more information.
2-59
Where Are the Airbags?
The driver's frontal airbag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
2-60
The right front passenger's frontal airbag is in the
instrument panel on the passenger's side.
{ WARNING:
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person causing
severe injury or even death. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do not put
anything between an occupant and an airbag,
and do not attach or put anything on the steering
wheel hub or on or near any other airbag
covering.
Do not use seat accessories that block the
inflation path of a seat-mounted side impact
airbag.
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
If your vehicle has seat-mounted side impact airbags for
the driver and right front passenger, they are in the side
of the seatbacks closest to the door.
2-61
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to
severe frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce
the potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver's or
right front passenger's head and chest. However, they
are only designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a
predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment
thresholds are used to predict how severe a crash is
likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help
restrain the occupants.
Whether your frontal airbags will or should deploy is not
based on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It depends
largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact, and
how quickly your vehicle slows down.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
.
.
2-62
If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
vehicle hits a moving object.
If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits an object that does not
deform.
.
If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole), the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
.
If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design.
In addition, your vehicle has dual-stage frontal airbags.
Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint according to
crash severity. Your vehicle has electronic frontal
sensors, which help the sensing system distinguish
between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe
frontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts, dual-stage
airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment. For
more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.
Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle
rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
The vehicle may or may not have seat-mounted side
impact airbags. See Airbag System on page 2‑58.
Seat-mounted side impact airbags are intended
to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes.
Seat-mounted side impact airbags will inflate if the
crash severity is above the system's designed threshold
level. The threshold level can vary with specific vehicle
design.
Seat-mounted side impact airbags are not intended to
inflate in frontal impacts, near-frontal impacts, rollovers,
or rear impacts. A seat-mounted side impact airbag is
intended to deploy on the side of the vehicle that is
struck.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair
costs were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined
by what the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and
how quickly the vehicle slows down. For seat-mounted
side impact airbags, deployment is determined by the
location and severity of the side impact.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In a deployment event, the sensing system sends an
electrical signal triggering a release of gas from the
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing the
bag to break out of the cover and deploy. The inflator,
the airbag, and related hardware are all part of the
airbag module.
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel
or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle.
Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety
belts. Frontal airbags distribute the force of the impact
more evenly over the occupant's upper body, stopping
the occupant more gradually. Seat-mounted side impact
airbags distribute the force of the impact more evenly
over the occupant's upper body.
But airbags would not help in many types of collisions,
primarily because the occupant's motion is not toward
those airbags. See When Should an Airbag Inflate? on
page 2‑62 for more information.
Airbags should never be regarded as anything more
than a supplement to safety belts.
Frontal airbag modules are located inside the steering
wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles with
seat-mounted side impact airbags, there are airbag
modules in the side of the front seatbacks closest to
the door.
2-63
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates?
After the frontal and seat-mounted side impact airbags
inflate, they quickly deflate, so quickly that some
people may not even realize the airbags inflated.
Some components of the airbag module may be hot
for several minutes. For location of the airbag modules,
see What Makes an Airbag Inflate? on page 2‑63.
The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you
may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may be
some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the
deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent the
driver from seeing out of the windshield or being able to
steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people from
leaving the vehicle.
{ WARNING:
When an airbag inflates, there may be dust in
the air. This dust could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the
vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do
so. If you have breathing problems but cannot get
out of the vehicle after an airbag inflates, then get
(Continued)
2-64
WARNING: (Continued)
fresh air by opening a window or a door. If you
experience breathing problems following an airbag
deployment, you should seek medical attention.
The vehicle has a feature that may automatically unlock
the doors, turn the interior lamps on, turn on the hazard
warning flashers, and shut off the fuel system after the
airbags inflate. You can lock the doors, turn the interior
lamps off, and turn the hazard warning flashers off by
using the controls for those features.
{ WARNING:
A crash severe enough to inflate the airbags may
have also damaged important functions in the
vehicle, such as the fuel system, brake and
steering systems, etc. Even if the vehicle appears
to be drivable after a moderate crash, there may
be concealed damage that could make it difficult
to safely operate the vehicle.
Use caution if you should attempt to restart the
engine after a crash has occurred.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the
right front passenger airbag.
.
Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for
the airbag system. If you do not get them, the
airbag system will not be there to help protect you
in another crash. A new system will include airbag
modules and possibly other parts. The service
manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace
other parts.
.
The vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic
module which records information after a crash.
See Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy on
page 8‑18 and Event Data Recorders on
page 8‑18.
.
Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag
system. Improper service can mean that the
airbag system will not work properly. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
Passenger Sensing System
The vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the
right front passenger position. The passenger airbag
status indicator will be visible, near the clock, located in
the center of the instrument panel, when the vehicle is
started.
United States
Canada
The words PASSENGER AIRBAG ON and
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF or the symbols for
on and off will be visible, during the system check.
When the system check is complete, either the words
PASSENGER AIRBAG ON and PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFF or the symbol for on and off will be visible. See
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 4‑26.
2-65
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger frontal airbag and seat-mounted side
impact airbag (if equipped) under certain conditions.
The driver airbags are not affected by the passenger
sensing system.
The passenger sensing system works with sensors
that are part of the right front passenger seat. The
sensors are designed to detect the presence of a
properly-seated occupant and determine if the right
front passenger frontal airbag and seat-mounted side
impact airbag (if equipped) should be enabled (may
inflate) or not.
According to accident statistics, children are safer
when properly secured in a rear seat in the correct
child restrain for their weight and size.
We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat,
including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing child
restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child seat; an
older child riding in a booster seat; and children, who
are large enough, using safety belts.
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
2-66
{ WARNING:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag
inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward
position.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped),
no system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that
an airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though the airbag(s) are off.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear
seat, even if the airbag(s) are off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn
off the right front passenger frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped) if:
.
The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
.
The system determines that an infant is present in
a child restraint.
.
A right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time.
.
Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
right front passenger frontal airbag and seat-mounted
side impact airbag (if equipped), the off indicator will
light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag or airbags
are off. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on
page 4‑26.
The passenger sensing system is designed to enable
(may inflate) the right front passenger frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped) anytime
the system senses that a person of adult size is sitting
properly in the right front passenger seat. When the
passenger sensing system has allowed the airbag or
airbags to be enabled, the on symbol will light and stay
lit to remind you that the airbag or airbags are active.
For some children who have outgrown child restraints
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing
system may or may not turn off the right front passenger
frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag
(if equipped), depending upon the person's seating
posture and body build. Everyone in your vehicle who
has outgrown child restraints should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is an airbag for that
person.
{ WARNING:
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and
stays on, it means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to
yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4‑25
for more information, including important safety
information.
2-67
If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child
Restraint
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove the child restraint from the vehicle.
3. Remove any additional items from the seat such
as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters,
or seat massagers.
4. Reinstall the child restraint following the directions
provided by the child restraint manufacturer and
refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position on page 2‑53.
2-68
5. If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, turn the
vehicle off. Then slightly recline the vehicle
seatback and adjust the seat cushion, if adjustable,
to make sure that the vehicle seatback is not
pushing the child restraint into the seat cushion.
Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped
under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,
adjust the head restraint. See Head Restraints on
page 2‑2.
6. Restart the vehicle.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child
restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle, and check
with your dealer/retailer.
If the Off Indicator is Lit for an
Adult‐Size Occupant
If this happens, use the following steps to allow the
system to detect that person and enable the right front
passenger frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact
airbag (if equipped):
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove any additional material from the seat,
such as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat
heaters, or seat massagers.
3. Place the seatback in the fully upright position.
4. Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered
on the seat cushion, with legs comfortably
extended.
5. Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in
this position for two to three minutes after the on
indicator is lit.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat.
2-69
Additional Factors Affecting System
Operation
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on
the seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which
helps the passenger sensing system maintain the
passenger airbag status. See “Safety Belts” and “Child
Restraints” in the Index for additional information about
the importance of proper restraint use.
Airbags affect how the vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places
around the vehicle. Your dealer/retailer and the service
manual have information about servicing the vehicle
and the airbag system. To purchase a service manual,
see Service Publications Ordering Information on
page 8‑17.
A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket
or cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat
covers, seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect
how well the passenger sensing system operates.
We recommend that you not use seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment other than any that GM has
approved for your specific vehicle. See Adding
Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 2‑71 for more information about modifications
that can affect how the system operates.
{ WARNING:
Stowing of articles under the passenger seat
or between the passenger seat cushion and
seatback may interfere with the proper operation
of the passenger sensing system.
2-70
{ WARNING:
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is turned off
and the battery is disconnected, an airbag can still
inflate during improper service. You can be injured
if you are close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid
yellow connectors. They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow proper service
procedures, and make sure the person performing
work for you is qualified to do so.
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Is there anything I might add to or change about
the vehicle that could keep the airbags from
working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle's
frame, bumper system, height, front end or side
sheet metal, they may keep the airbag system from
working properly. Changing or moving any parts
of the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing
and diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrument
panel, front sensors, or airbag wiring can affect the
operation of the airbag system.
In addition, the vehicle has a passenger sensing
system for the right front passenger position, which
includes sensors that are part of the passenger seat.
The passenger sensing system may not operate
properly if the original seat trim is replaced with
non-GM covers, upholstery or trim, or with GM
covers, upholstery or trim designed for a different
vehicle. Any object, such as an aftermarket seat
heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device,
installed under or on top of the seat fabric, could
also interfere with the operation of the passenger
sensing system. This could either prevent proper
deployment of the passenger airbag(s) or prevent
the passenger sensing system from properly turning
off the passenger airbag(s). See Passenger Sensing
System on page 2‑65.
If you have any questions about this, you should
contact Customer Assistance before you modify
your vehicle. The phone numbers and addresses
for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the
Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.
See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 8‑2.
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get my
vehicle modified. How can I find out whether this
will affect my airbag system?
A: If you have questions, call Customer Assistance.
The phone numbers and addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See
Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 8‑2.
In addition, your dealer/retailer and the service manual
have information about the location of the airbag
sensors, sensing and diagnostic module and airbag
wiring.
2-71
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems
Safety Belts
Now and then, check that the safety belt reminder
light, safety belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors,
and anchorages are all working properly.
Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system
parts that might keep a safety belt system from doing its
job. See your dealer/retailer to have it repaired. Torn or
frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash. They
can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn or
frayed, get a new one right away.
Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working.
See Safety Belt Reminders on page 4‑24 for more
information.
Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Care of Safety
Belts on page 6‑82.
2-72
Airbags
The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled
maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 4‑25 for more information.
Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened,
or broken, the airbag may not work properly.
Do not open or break the airbag coverings. If there
are any opened or broken airbag covers, have the
airbag covering and/or airbag module replaced.
For the location of the airbag modules, see What
Makes an Airbag Inflate? on page 2‑63. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
{ WARNING:
A crash can damage the restraint systems in your
vehicle. A damaged restraint system may not
properly protect the person using it, resulting in
serious injury or even death in a crash. To help
make sure your restraint systems are working
properly after a crash, have them inspected and
any necessary replacements made as soon as
possible.
If the vehicle has the LATCH system and it was being
used during a crash, you may need new LATCH system
parts.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the
safety belt or LATCH system (if equipped), was not
being used at the time of the crash.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
Have the safety belt pretensioners checked if the
vehicle has been in a crash, if the airbag readiness light
stays on after the vehicle is started, or while you are
driving. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4‑25.
If the vehicle has been in a crash, do you need new
safety belts or LATCH system (if equipped) parts?
After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary.
But the safety belt assemblies that were used during
any crash may have been stressed or damaged. See
your dealer/retailer to have the safety belt assemblies
inspected or replaced.
2-73
2 NOTES
2-74
Section 3
Features and Controls
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Doors and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Central Door Unlocking System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Door Ajar Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Rear Door Security Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Liftgate (Hatchback) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Manual Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Content Theft-Deterrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Transmission Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual Transmission Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shifting Into Park (Automatic Transmission) . . .
Shifting Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking the Vehicle (Manual Transmission) . . . .
Parking Over Things That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Running the Vehicle While Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outside Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outside Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outside Convex Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outside Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-19
3-20
3-23
3-26
3-28
3-28
3-30
3-31
3-31
3-32
3-33
3-34
3-34
3-34
3-35
3-35
3-35
3-36
3-36
3-36
3-37
3-1
Keys
{ WARNING:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key
is dangerous for many reasons, children or others
could be badly injured or even killed. They could
operate the power windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move. The windows will
function with the keys in the ignition and children
could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the
path of a closing window. Do not leave the keys in
a vehicle with children.
The key can be used for the ignition, doors and all other
locks.
The key has a key code tag that the dealer/retailer or
qualified locksmith can use to make new keys. Store
this information in a safe place, not in your vehicle.
3-2
Your vehicle may have an electronic immobilizer
designed to protect your car against theft. If so, only
keys with the correct electronic code can be used
to start the vehicle. See Immobilizer Operation on
page 3‑14 for additional information. If a replacement
key or an additional key is needed, it must be
purchased from your dealer/retailer or certified
locksmith.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in the vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
In an emergency, contact Roadside Assistance.
See Roadside Assistance Program on page 8‑7 for
more information.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8‑20
for information regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and
RSS-210/211 of Industry Canada.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
If there is a decrease in the RKE operating range,
try this:
.
Check the distance. The transmitter may be too
far from the vehicle. Stand closer during rainy or
snowy weather.
.
Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left
or right, hold the transmitter higher, and try again.
.
Check the transmitter's battery. See “Battery
Replacement” later in this section.
.
If the transmitter is still not working correctly, see
your dealer/retailer or a qualified technician for
service.
3-3
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation
The following functions may be available if the vehicle
has RKE:
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter functions
work up to 65 feet (20 m) away from the vehicle.
Press to lock all of the doors. If all of the
doors and the trunk or liftgate are closed, the hazard
lamps flash once and the horn will sound to indicate
that locking has occurred and the theft-deterrent system
is active.
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter. See Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System on page 3‑3.
Q (Lock):
K (Unlock): Press to unlock all of the doors. The
hazard lamps flash twice to indicate that unlocking
has occurred and that the theft-deterrent system is
deactivated. If the doors are not opened within
30 seconds the doors will lock again.
3 (Panic) (Hatchback): Press to sound the panic
alarm. The hazard lamps will flash and the panic alarm
will stay on for about 30 seconds. Press any of the
buttons on the transmitter to turn off the alarm.
V (Remote Trunk Release) (Sedan):
Press and hold
for approximately one second to open the trunk.
Hatchback
Sedan
The LED light (A) on the transmitter flashes when the
buttons on the transmitter are pressed. If the light does
not flash see “Battery Replacement” later in this section.
The buttons do not operate and the theft-deterrent
system does not activate if the key is in the ignition.
3-4
Programming Transmitters to the
Vehicle
Only RKE transmitters programmed to the vehicle will
work. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement
can be purchased and programmed through your
dealer/retailer. When the replacement transmitter
is programmed to the vehicle, all remaining
transmitters must also be programmed. Any lost
or stolen transmitters no longer work once the new
transmitter is programmed. Each vehicle can have
up to five transmitters programmed to it.
Battery Replacement
Replace the battery if the LED on the transmitter does
not flash when you press the buttons.
Notice: When replacing the battery, do not touch
any of the circuitry on the transmitter. Static from
your body could damage the transmitter.
To replace the battery:
1. Remove the screw from the back of the cover and
open the cover of the transmitter.
2. Pull the transmitter out of the cover and carefully
turn the circle cover of the transmitter unit
toward open.
3. Remove the battery.
4. Insert the new battery, positive side facing up. Use
one three-volt, CR1620, or equivalent, type battery.
5. Turn the circle cover of the transmitter unit toward
close and put the transmitter unit in the cover.
6. Put the two halves back together and replace the
screw. Make sure the cover is on tightly, so water
will not get in.
7. Test the transmitter operation.
3-5
Doors and Locks
WARNING: (Continued)
Door Locks
.
{ WARNING:
Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or stop
your vehicle. Locking your doors can help
prevent this from happening.
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
.
.
3-6
Passengers, especially children, can easily
open the doors and fall out of a moving
vehicle. When a door is locked, the handle
will not open it. The chance of being thrown
out of the vehicle in a crash is increased if
the doors are not locked. So, all passengers
should wear safety belts properly and the
doors should be locked whenever the vehicle
is driven.
Young children who get into unlocked vehicles
may be unable to get out. A child can be
overcome by extreme heat and can suffer
permanent injuries or even death from heat
stroke. Always lock the vehicle whenever
leaving it.
(Continued)
There are several ways to lock and unlock the vehicle.
From the outside, use your key or the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter. See Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation on page 3‑4.
To manually unlock the front doors from the outside,
insert the key and turn it counterclockwise. To manually
lock the doors, insert the key and turn it clockwise.
All doors, except for the driver door, can be locked by
pushing down the manual door lock and then closing
the door. On vehicles with power locks, the driver door
can only by locked from the outside by using the key or
the optional RKE transmitter.
From the inside, all of the doors can be locked and
unlocked by pushing or pulling the manual door lock
located on each door.
Central Door Unlocking System
Rear Door Security Locks
The vehicle may be equipped with the central door
unlocking system. This system is activated from the
driver door.
The vehicle has rear door
security locks on each
rear door that prevents
passengers from opening
the rear doors from the
inside.
From the outside, lock or unlock all the doors by using
either the key or the RKE transmitter, if equipped. From
the inside, lock or unlock all the doors by using the
driver door lock switch.
Door Ajar Reminder
If one of the doors, trunk,
or liftgate is not closed
properly while the ignition
is on, the door ajar light
on the instrument panel
comes on and stays on
until the doors are closed.
Using the Rear Door Security Lock
1. Move the lever up to lock.
2. Close the door.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to the other rear door lock.
Notice: Pulling the inside door handle while the rear
door security locks are engaged could damage your
vehicle. Do not pull the inside door handle while the
rear door security locks are engaged.
The rear doors on the vehicle cannot be opened from
the inside while this feature is in use.
3-7
Opening a Rear Door When the
Security Lock is On
1. Unlock the door from the inside.
2. Open the door from the outside.
If you do not cancel the security lock, adults or older
children who ride in the rear will not be able to open the
rear door from the inside.
Canceling the Rear Door Security Lock
1. Unlock the door from the inside and open the door
from the outside.
2. Move the lever down to unlock.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to the other rear door lock.
The rear door locks can now be locked and unlocked
normally.
Trunk
{ WARNING:
Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle if it is driven
with the liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with any
objects that pass through the seal between the
body and the trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine
exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which
cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
If the vehicle must be driven with the liftgate,
or trunk/hatch open:
.
Close all of the windows.
.
Fully open the air outlets on or under the
instrument panel.
.
Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting
that brings in only outside air and set the fan
speed to the highest setting. See Climate
Control System in the Index.
.
If the vehicle is equipped with a power liftgate,
disable the power liftgate function.
For more information about carbon monoxide, see
Engine Exhaust on page 3‑32.
3-8
To open the trunk on a sedan from outside of the
vehicle, insert the key into the lock cylinder and turn the
key clockwise or use the RKE transmitter, if equipped.
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on
page 3‑4.
Remote Trunk Release
The vehicle may have
a trunk release lever
located on the outboard
side of the driver seat.
Pull the lever to open the
trunk.
This feature allows the trunk to be opened from inside
the vehicle. the vehicle may have either a release
button or a release lever.
The vehicle may have a
release button located on
the driver door. Press it to
open the trunk.
When closing the trunk, close from the center to ensure
it fully latches.
3-9
Emergency Trunk Release Handle
Notice: Do not use the emergency trunk release
handle as a tie-down or anchor point when securing
items in the trunk as it could damage the handle.
The emergency trunk release handle is only
intended to aid a person trapped in a latched trunk,
enabling them to open the trunk from the inside.
Liftgate (Hatchback)
{ WARNING:
Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle if it is driven
with the liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with any
objects that pass through the seal between the
body and the trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine
exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which
cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
If the vehicle must be driven with the liftgate,
or trunk/hatch open:
There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunk release
handle located on the underside of the trunk lid. This
handle will glow following exposure to light. Pull the
release handle down to open the trunk from the inside.
3-10
.
Close all of the windows.
.
Fully open the air outlets on or under the
instrument panel.
(Continued)
WARNING: (Continued)
.
Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting
that brings in only outside air and set the fan
speed to the highest setting. See Climate
Control System in the Index.
.
If the vehicle is equipped with a power liftgate,
disable the power liftgate function.
For more information about carbon monoxide, see
Engine Exhaust on page 3‑32.
To unlock the liftgate on a hatchback from outside of
the vehicle, insert the key in the lock cylinder and turn
it counterclockwise or use the RKE transmitter,
if equipped.
The handle is located above the right side of the license
plate. Pull the handle toward you and raise the liftgate.
When closing the liftgate, close from the center to
ensure it fully latches.
To lock the liftgate, insert the key into the lock cylinder
and turn it clockwise or use the RKE transmitter,
if equipped.
The liftgate can also be locked or unlocked by the
central door unlocking system or RKE transmitter,
if equipped. See Central Door Unlocking System on
page 3‑7 and Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 3‑4.
3-11
Windows
{ WARNING:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat and
suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat
stroke. Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a
pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the windows
closed in warm or hot weather.
3-12
Manual Windows
Use the window crank to open and close each window.
The rear windows do not open fully.
Power Windows
{ WARNING:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the keys is
dangerous for many reasons, children or others
could be badly injured or even killed. They could
operate the power windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move. The windows will
function and they could be seriously injured or
killed if caught in the path of a closing window.
Do not leave keys in a vehicle with children.
When there are children in the rear seat use the
window lockout button to prevent unintentional
operation of the windows.
On vehicles with power windows, the switches are
located on the driver door. In addition, each passenger
door has a switch for its own window.
The ignition must be turned to ON/RUN to use the
power windows. To lower the window, press and hold
the switch. To raise the window, lift up on the switch.
Release the switch when the window reaches the
desired level.
3-13
Window Lockout
Theft-Deterrent Systems
The window lockout is
located with the driver
power window switches.
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
This vehicle has theft-deterrent features, however, they
do not make it impossible to steal.
Immobilizer
Press the lockout button to stop the rear passengers
from using the rear window switches. The driver can still
operate all the windows with the lockout on. Press the
lockout button again to return to normal window
operation.
Sun Visors
To block out glare you can swing down the sun visors.
You can also remove them from the center mount and
swing them to the side.
Visor Vanity Mirror
The vehicle has vanity mirrors located on the back of
the sun visors. Swing down the sun visor to expose the
vanity mirror.
3-14
See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8‑20
for information regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and
RSS-210/211 of Industry Canada.
Immobilizer Operation
The vehicle may have a passive theft-deterrent system.
The immobilizer system prevents the vehicle from being
started by an unauthorized person by isolating the
power supply to the ignition system, the fuel pump and
the fuel injectors.
The system is automatically armed when the key is
removed from the ignition. You do not have to manually
arm or disarm the system.
Your vehicle has a special key that works with the
theft-deterrent system. There is a transponder in the
key head that is electronically coded. The correct key
will start the vehicle. An invalid key immobilizes the
engine. If your key is ever damaged, you may not be
able to start your vehicle.
If you are ever driving and the security light comes on
and stays on, you will be able to restart the engine if
you turn it off. The theft-deterrent system, however, is
not working properly and must be serviced by your
dealer/retailer. Your vehicle is not protected by the
theft-deterrent system at this time.
When trying to start the vehicle, if the engine does not
start and the security light flashes or comes on, there
may be a problem with the theft-deterrent system. Turn
the ignition off and try again.
In an emergency, contact Roadside Assistance.
See Roadside Assistance Program on page 8‑7.
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to
be undamaged, try another key. At this time, you may
also want to check the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit
Breakers on page 6‑87. If the engine still does not start
with the other key, your vehicle needs service. If your
vehicle does start, the first key may be faulty. See your
dealer/retailer who can have a new key made.
Your vehicle may have a content theft-deterrent system.
Content Theft-Deterrent
The theft-deterrent system will not arm when you lock
the doors using the key or the manual door lock. It arms
only when you use the remote keyless entry transmitter.
Up to 10 keys may be programmed for the vehicle.
If you lose or damage your keys, only a dealer/retailer
can have new keys made.
3-15
Arming the System
To arm the system, do the following:
1. Close the doors, the windows, the hood, and the
trunk or liftgate.
Make sure that the windows are closed, as the
system can be armed even if the windows
are open.
2. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF and remove the key
from the ignition.
If the key is inserted in the ignition, the transmitter
will not arm the theft-deterrent system.
3. Lock the doors by pressing the lock button on the
remote keyless entry transmitter.
3-16
.
The LED light on the transmitter will flash once.
.
All of the doors will lock.
.
The hazard warning lamps will flash once and
the horn will sound.
.
The security light will flash continuously to
indicate that the theft-deterrent system is
armed . The security light is located on the
center of the instrument panel near the clock.
To avoid activating the alarm by accident, do one of the
following:
.
Unlock the driver's or passenger's front door using
the key.
.
Press the unlock button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter.
Unlocking a door any other way will activate the alarm
when a door or the trunk or liftgate is opened.
If you do not want to arm the theft-deterrent system,
lock the vehicle using the key or the manual door locks.
Disarming the System
To disarm the system, do one of the following:
.
Unlock the driver's or passenger's front door using
the key.
.
Press the unlock button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter.
‐ The LED light on the transmitter will flash once.
‐ All of the doors will unlock.
‐ The hazard warning lamps will flash twice.
If the door is not opened or if the engine is not started
within 30 seconds after disarming the system using the
transmitter, all of the doors will automatically lock and
the theft-deterrent mode will rearm.
How the System Alarm is Activated
If a door or the trunk or liftgate is opened without using
the key or the remote keyless entry transmitter, the horn
will sound and the lamps will flash for up to 30 seconds.
How to Turn Off the System Alarm
If the system alarm is active, it can be deactivated using
one of the following methods:
.
Press one of the buttons on the remote keyless
entry transmitter.
.
Unlock the driver's or passenger's front door using
the key.
Otherwise, the alarm will automatically stop after
30 seconds. The system will then lock the doors and
rearm the theft-deterrent system.
How to Detect a Tamper Condition
If the hazard warning lamps flash once when you press
the lock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter,
the theft-deterrent system alarm was activated while
you were away.
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: The vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run
if you follow these guidelines:
.
Do not drive at any one constant speed,
fast or slow, for the first 805 km (500 miles).
Do not make full-throttle starts. Avoid
downshifting to brake or slow the vehicle.
.
Avoid making hard stops for the first 322 km
(200 miles) or so. During this time the new
brake linings are not yet broken in. Hard
stops with new linings can mean premature
wear and earlier replacement. Follow this
breaking-in guideline every time you get new
brake linings.
Following break‐in, engine speed and load can be
gradually increased.
3-17
Ignition Positions
The ignition switch has
four different positions.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key to turn in the
ignition could cause damage to the switch or break
the key. Use the correct key, make sure it is all the
way in, and turn it only with your hand. If the key
cannot be turned by hand, see your dealer/retailer.
LOCK/OFF: This position locks the steering wheel,
ignition, shift lever and transmission. This is the only
position in which you can insert or remove the key.
The steering can bind with the wheels turned off center.
If this happens, move the steering wheel from right to
left while turning the key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If this
doesn't work, then the vehicle needs service.
{ WARNING:
On manual transmission vehicles, turning the key
to LOCK/OFF will lock the steering column and
result in a loss of ability to steer the vehicle. This
could cause a collision. If you need to turn the
engine off while the vehicle is moving, turn the
key only to ACC/ACCESSORY. Do not push the
key in while the vehicle is moving.
ACC/ACCESSORY: This position operates some of the
electrical accessories, such as the radio, but not the
climate control system.
ON/RUN: This position can be used to operate the
electrical accessories, and to display some instrument
panel cluster warning and indicator lights. The switch
stays in this position when the engine is running.
If you leave the key in the ACC/ACCESSORY or
ON/RUN position with the engine off, the battery could
be drained. You may not be able to start the vehicle if
the battery is allowed to drain for an extended period
of time.
START: This is the position that starts the engine.
When the engine cranks, release the key. The ignition
switch returns to ON/RUN for driving. Do not turn the
key to START if the engine is running.
3-18
Starting the Engine
Automatic Transmission
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral). The
engine will not start in any other position. To restart
the engine when the vehicle is already moving, use
N (Neutral) only.
Notice: Do not try to shift to P (Park) if the vehicle
is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to P (Park) only when the
vehicle is stopped.
Manual Transmission
The shift lever should be in N (Neutral) and the parking
brake engaged. Hold the clutch pedal to the floor and
start the engine. The vehicle will not start if the clutch
pedal is not all the way down.
Starting Procedure
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition to START. When the engine cranks, let go
of the key. The idle speed will go down as the
engine gets warm.
The vehicle has a Computer‐Controlled Cranking
System. It assists in starting the engine and
protects components. If the ignition key is turned
to START and then released when the engine
begins cranking, the engine will continue cranking
for a few seconds or until the engine starts.
If the engine does not start and the key is held in
START, cranking will be stopped after 15 seconds
to prevent damage. To prevent gear damage,
cranking is not allowed if the engine is running.
Engine cranking can be stopped by turning the
ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF.
Notice: Holding the key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause the battery to be
drained much sooner. And the excessive heat can
damage the starter motor. Wait about 15 seconds
between each try to help avoid draining the battery
or damaging the starter.
2. If the engine does not start, wait about 15 seconds
and try again. Wait about 15 seconds between
each try.
When the engine has run about 10 seconds to
warm up, the vehicle is ready to be driven. Do not
run the engine at high speed when it is cold.
If the weather is below freezing (0°C or 32°F), let
the engine run for a few minutes to warm up.
3-19
3. If the engine still will not start, or starts but then
stops, it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to
the floor and holding it there as you hold the key
in START for about three seconds. If the vehicle
starts briefly but then stops again, do the same
thing, but this time keep the pedal down for five or
six seconds. This clears the extra gasoline from
the engine.
Vehicles with an engine heater should be plugged in at
least four hours before starting. To assist you in finding
the cord, the vehicle will have one of the following
designs:
Removable Extension Cord
1. Turn off the engine.
Notice: The engine is designed to work with the
electronics in the vehicle. If electrical parts or
accessories are added, you could change the way
the engine operates. Before adding electrical
equipment, check with your dealer/retailer. If you do
not, the engine might not perform properly. Any
resulting damage would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty.
Engine Heater
The engine heater can provide easier starting
and better fuel economy during engine warm-up in
cold weather conditions at or below −18°C (0°F).
2. Remove the extension cord from the trunk. Open
the hood and connect the electrical cord with the
extension cord.
3. Plug the extension cord into a normal, grounded
110-Volt AC outlet.
3-20
{ WARNING:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong
kind of extension cord could overheat and cause
a fire. You could be seriously injured. Plug the
cord into a properly grounded three-prong
110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will not reach,
use a heavy-duty three-prong extension cord
rated for at least 15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug both
the extension cord and under hood electrical cord,
and store them as they were before. This will keep
them away from moving engine parts, and prevent
damage.
The length of time the heater should remain plugged in
depends on several factors. Ask a dealer/retailer in the
area where you will be parking the vehicle for the best
advice on this.
3-21
Attached Extension Cord
1. Turn off the engine.
{ WARNING:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong
kind of extension cord could overheat and cause
a fire. You could be seriously injured. Plug the
cord into a properly grounded three-prong
110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will not reach,
use a heavy-duty three-prong extension cord
rated for at least 15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away from
moving engine parts. If you do not it could be
damaged.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. The
cord is located in the driver side of the engine
compartment, near the battery.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-Volt AC outlet.
3-22
The length of time the heater should remain plugged in
depends on several factors. Ask a dealer/retailer in the
area where you will be parking the vehicle for the best
advice on this.
Automatic Transmission Operation
{ WARNING:
It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift
lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly
level ground, always set the parking brake and
move the shift lever to P (Park). See Shifting Into
Park (Automatic Transmission) on page 3‑28.
If the vehicle has an automatic transmission, the shift
lever is located on the console between the seats.
Movement between certain positions requires pushing
the release button on the front of the shifter.
P (Park): This position locks the front wheels. It is the
best position to use when you start the engine because
the vehicle cannot move easily.
Ensure that the shift lever is fully in P (Park) before
starting the engine. The vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift lock control system. You have to
apply the brake pedal before you can shift from P (Park)
when the key is in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift out
of P (Park) while holding the brake pedal down, see
Shifting Out of Park on page 3‑30.
3-23
R (Reverse): Use this gear to back up.
When shifting from N (Neutral) to R (Reverse), you need
to apply the brake pedal and push the release button on
the front of the shifter.
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) while the vehicle is
moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicle
is stopped.
To rock the vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice or sand without damaging the transmission, see
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on
page 5‑14.
N (Neutral): In this position, the engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart the engine while
the vehicle is already moving, use N (Neutral) only.
Also, use N (Neutral) when the vehicle is being towed.
{ WARNING:
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless your
foot is firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could
move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit
people or objects. Do not shift into a drive gear
while the engine is running at high speed.
3-24
Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) with
the engine running at high speed may damage the
transmission. The repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Be sure the engine is not
running at high speed when shifting the vehicle.
D4 (Automatic Overdrive): This position is for normal
driving.
When operating the vehicle in severe cold conditions,
the transmission may be prevented from shifting
into D4 gear until the transmission fluid has warmed
up to it's operational temperature.
Notice: If the vehicle seems to start up rather
slowly or not shift gears when you go faster, and
you continue to drive the vehicle that way, you
could damage the transmission. Have the vehicle
serviced right away. You can drive in 2 (Second)
when you are driving less than 35 mph (55 km/h)
and D4 (Automatic Overdrive) for higher speeds
until then.
2 (Second): This position gives you more power but
lower fuel economy. You can use 2 (Second) on hills.
It can help control vehicle speed as you go down steep
mountain roads, while using the brakes off and on.
Notice: Do not drive in 2 (Second) at speeds
over 65 mph (105 km/h), or you can damage the
transmission. Use D4 (Automatic Overdrive) as
much as possible. Do not shift into 2 (Second)
unless you are going slower than 65 mph (105 km/h)
or you can damage the engine.
Hold Mode
If the vehicle's transmission has hold mode, you can
select this mode to allow the automatic transmission to
stay in a specific gear range.
1 (First): This position gives you even more power but
lower fuel economy than 2 (Second). You can use it on
very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the shift
lever is put in 1 (First), the transmission will not shift into
first gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator pedal
may damage the transmission. The repair will not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. If you are stuck, do
not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill, use the
brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
If there is a malfunction with the automatic transmission,
the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) or the HOLD
indicator light will turn on or flash. See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 4‑31.
Have the vehicle fixed as soon as possible.
Press the HOLD button on the shift lever console to turn
on hold mode. The HOLD light on the instrument panel
cluster will turn on. Press the button again to turn off
hold mode, and return to normal automatic transmission
operation.
3-25
When hold mode is activated, the transmission runs as
follows:
Selector Lever Position
D4
2
1
Gear Range
Third Gear
Second Gear
First Gear
Manual Transmission Operation
Five-Speed
See Hold Mode Light on page 4‑29.
When Hold Mode is selected in D4 (Drive), the
transmission is held in 3 (Third) gear, which locks out
D4 (Drive). This allows for engine braking when slowing
from higher speeds.
When Hold Mode is selected in 2 (Second), the
transmission will start in 2 (Second) gear instead of
1 (First), helping to reduce wheel spin when starting
out on slippery surface such as snow, mud or ice.
Since selecting Hold Mode in D4 (Drive) locks the
transmission in 3 (Third), and prevents downshifts to
2 (Second) or 1 (First), acceleration from a stop or near
stop on dry pavement will be slower than expected.
Hold Mode should not be selected during these
situations.
3-26
This is your shift pattern.
1 (First): Press the clutch pedal and shift into 1 (First).
Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the
accelerator pedal.
You can shift into 1 (First) when you are going less than
20 mph (32 km/h). If you have come to a complete stop
and it is hard to shift into 1 (First), put the shift lever in
N (Neutral) and let up on the clutch. Press the clutch
pedal back down. Then shift into 1 (First).
2 (Second): Press the clutch pedal as you let up on the
accelerator pedal and shift into 2 (Second). Then, slowly
let up on the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator
pedal.
3 (Third), 4 (Fourth) and 5 (Fifth): Shift into 3 (Third),
4 (Fourth) and 5 (Fifth), the same way you do for
2 (Second). Slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you
press the accelerator pedal.
To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press
the brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops, press
the clutch pedal and the brake pedal, and shift to
N (Neutral).
N (Neutral): Use this position when you start or idle the
engine.
R (Reverse): To back up, press down the clutch
pedal, lift up the ring on the shift lever and shift into
R (Reverse). Let up on the clutch pedal slowly while
pressing the accelerator pedal.
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) while the vehicle is
moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicle
is stopped.
Also, use R (Reverse), along with the parking brake, for
parking the vehicle.
Shift Speeds
{ WARNING:
If you skip a gear when you downshift, you could
lose control of the vehicle. You could injure
yourself or others. Do not shift down more than
one gear at a time when you downshift.
Up‐Shift Light
Vehicles equipped with
a manual transmission
may have an up-shift light.
This light indicates when
to shift to the next higher
gear for better fuel
economy.
For the best fuel economy, accelerate slowly and shift
when the light comes on, and if the weather, road, and
traffic conditions allow.
It is normal for the light to go on and off if the
accelerator position changes quickly. Ignore the
light during downshifts.
3-27
Parking Brake
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure
that the parking brake is fully released and the
brake warning light is off before driving.
Shifting Into Park (Automatic
Transmission)
{ WARNING:
The parking brake lever is located between the bucket
seats.
To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedal down
and pull up on the parking brake lever. If the ignition
is on, the brake system warning light will come on.
See Brake System Warning Light on page 4‑28.
To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedal
down. Pull the parking brake lever up until you can
press the release button. Hold the release button in
as you move the brake lever all the way down.
3-28
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking
brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be
sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are
on fairly level ground, use the steps that follow.
1. Hold the brake pedal down and set the parking
brake. See Parking Brake on page 3‑28 for more
information.
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) by pressing the
button on the shift lever and pushing the lever all
the way toward the front of the vehicle.
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave the vehicle with the ignition key in your hand,
the vehicle is in P (Park).
Leaving the Vehicle With the Engine
Running (Automatic Transmission)
{ WARNING:
It can be dangerous to leave the vehicle with the
engine running. The vehicle could move suddenly
if the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the
parking brake firmly set. And, if you leave the
vehicle with the engine running, it could overheat
and even catch fire. You or others could be
injured. Do not leave the vehicle with the engine
running.
If you have to leave the vehicle with the engine running,
be sure the vehicle is in P (Park) and the parking brake
is firmly set before you leave it. After you have moved
the shift lever into P (Park), hold the brake pedal down.
Then see if you can move the shift lever away from
P (Park) without first pushing the shift lock release
button. If you can, it means that the shift lever was not
fully locked into P (Park).
Torque Lock (Automatic Transmission)
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your
transmission into P (Park) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl
in the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the
shift lever out of P (Park). This is called “torque lock.”
To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then
shift into P (Park) properly before you leave the driver
seat. To find out how, see Shifting Into Park (Automatic
Transmission) on page 3‑28.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
P (Park) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have
another vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of
the pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission,
so you can pull the shift lever out of P (Park).
3-29
Shifting Out of Park
Vehicles with an automatic transmission have a shift
interlock system. You have to apply the brake pedal
before you can shift from P (Park) when the ignition is in
the ON/RUN position. See Automatic Transmission
Operation on page 3‑23.
If you cannot shift out of P (Park) while holding the
brake pedal down, try this:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition off and remove the key.
3. Remove the hole cover from the shift lock slot by
prying it off using a small, flat object. The shift lock
release slot is located at the top of the shift lever.
4. Insert the key into the shift lock slot and press and
hold the key.
5. Shift to N (Neutral).
6. Remove the key from the slot, insert the key into
the ignition and start the engine.
7. Replace the shift-lock release slot cover.
8. Apply and hold the brake pedal fully and release
the parking brake.
9. Shift to the gear you want.
10. Have the vehicle fixed as soon as you can.
3-30
Parking the Vehicle
(Manual Transmission)
Before leaving the vehicle, do the following:
1. Hold the brake pedal down and firmly apply the
parking brake.
2. Fully press in the clutch pedal and place the shift
lever into the gear position as stated below:
.
When parking on level ground, place the shift
lever into N (Neutral).
.
When parking downhill, place the shift lever in
R (Reverse).
.
When parking uphill, place the shift lever in
1 (First).
Parking Over Things That Burn
{ WARNING:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under the vehicle and ignite. Do not park
over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other things that
can burn.
3. After shifting, turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF,
remove the key and release the clutch.
3-31
Engine Exhaust
{ WARNING:
Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. Exposure to CO
can cause unconsciousness and even death.
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:
.
The vehicle idles in areas with poor ventilation
(parking garages, tunnels, deep snow that
may block underbody airflow or tail pipes).
.
The exhaust smells or sounds strange or
different.
.
The exhaust system leaks due to corrosion or
damage.
(Continued)
3-32
WARNING: (Continued)
.
The vehicle’s exhaust system has been
modified, damaged or improperly repaired.
.
There are holes or openings in the vehicle
body from damage or after-market
modifications that are not completely sealed.
If unusual fumes are detected or if it is suspected
that exhaust is coming into the vehicle:
.
Drive it only with the windows
completely down.
.
Have the vehicle repaired immediately.
Never park the vehicle with the engine running in
an enclosed area such as a garage or a building
that has no fresh air ventilation.
Running the Vehicle While Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
{ WARNING:
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poor
ventilation is dangerous. Engine exhaust may
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust contains
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen
or smelled. It can cause unconsciousness and
even death. Never run the engine in an enclosed
area that has no fresh air ventilation. For more
information, see Engine Exhaust on page 3‑32.
{ WARNING:
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the
automatic transmission shift lever is not fully in
P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set. The
vehicle can roll. Do not leave the vehicle when the
engine is running unless you have to. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be
sure the vehicle will not move, even when it is on
fairly level ground, always set the parking brake
and move the automatic transmission shift lever to
P (Park), or the manual transmission shift lever to
Neutral.
Follow the proper steps to be sure the vehicle will not
move. If the vehicle has an automatic transmission,
see Shifting Into Park (Automatic Transmission) on
page 3‑28.
3-33
Mirrors
Outside Manual Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror
Adjust the mirrors to see a little of the side of your
vehicle.
Hold the inside rearview mirror in the center to move it
for a clearer view behind your vehicle. Adjust the mirror
to avoid glare from the headlamps behind you. Push the
tab forward for daytime use and pull it for nighttime use.
Controls for the outside manual mirrors are located next
to each mirror.
Manually fold the mirrors inward to prevent damage
when going through an automatic car wash. To fold,
push the mirror toward the vehicle. Push the mirror
outward, to return it to the original position.
3-34
Outside Power Mirrors
The control is located on
the instrument panel, left
of the steering wheel.
Outside Convex Mirror
{ WARNING:
A convex mirror can make things, like other
vehicles, look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you could
hit a vehicle on the right. Check the inside mirror
or glance over your shoulder before changing
lanes.
The ignition must be turned to ON/RUN to adjust the
mirrors.
To adjust the mirrors:
1. Select the mirror you want to adjust by moving
the selector switch to L for the driver side mirror
or R for the passenger side mirror.
2. Press one of the four arrows located on the control
pad to move the mirror to the desired direction.
Manually fold the mirrors inward to prevent damage
when going through an automatic car wash. To fold,
push the mirror toward the vehicle. Push the mirror
outward, to return to its original position.
The passenger side mirror is convex shaped. A convex
mirror's surface is curved so more can be seen from the
driver seat.
Outside Heated Mirrors
For vehicles with this feature:
< (Rear Window Defogger):
Press to heat the
mirrors. See “Rear Window and Outside Mirror
Defogger” under Climate Control System on page 4‑16
for more information.
3-35
Storage Areas
Cupholders
The vehicle may have shopping bag hooks on each
front seatback. Lift the headrest to access the hooks.
Two cupholders are located in the center instrument
panel, below the climate control system. To use the
cupholder, push in on the cover, then pull it out. After
use, push in the cupholder until it latches.
Glove Box
Lift up on the glove box lever to open it.
3-36
There is also a cupholder located in the rear of the
center console.
Sunroof
On vehicles with this
feature, the switch is
located on the headliner
between the sun visors.
To fully open the sunroof, press and hold the passenger
side of the switch. The sunshade opens with the
sunroof. To close the sunroof, press and hold the driver
side of the switch. The sunroof will stop if the switch is
released during operation. Close the sunshade
manually.
In both the vent and fully open positions, the air flow
can be adjusted by pushing and holding the switch until
the sunroof moves to the desired position.
The sunroof only operates when the ignition is turned to
ON/RUN. The sunroof can be opened to a vent position
or it can be opened all of the way.
To open the sunroof to the vent position, open the
sunshade. Then press and hold the driver side of the
switch. To close the sunroof, press and hold the
passenger side of the switch until the sunroof reaches
the desired position.
The sunroof cannot be opened or closed if the vehicle
has an electrical failure.
Dirt and debris may collect on the sunroof seal or in the
tracks that could cause an issue with sunroof operation,
noise or plug the water frainage system. Periodically
open the sunroof and remove any obstacles or loose
debris. Wipe the sunroof seal and roof sealing area
using a clean cloth, mild soap, and water. Do not
remove grease from sunroof.
3-37
2 NOTES
3-38
Section 4
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Tilt Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Turn and Lane-Change Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Windshield Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Exterior Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Instrument Panel Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Dome Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Inadvertent Power Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Accessory Power Outlet(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Climate Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Outlet Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Passenger Compartment Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Indicators . . . . . . . .
Instrument Panel Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speedometer and Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Up-Shift Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake System Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light . . .
Hold Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change Engine Oil Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Highbeam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) Indicator
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-21
4-22
4-23
4-23
4-23
4-24
4-25
4-26
4-27
4-27
4-28
4-29
4-29
4-30
4-30
4-31
4-33
4-34
4-35
4-35
4-35
4-35
4-36
4-36
4-37
4-1
Section 4
Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio System(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio with CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio with Six-Disc CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using an MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2
Instrument Panel
4-38
4-39
4-40
4-45
4-53
4-61
XM Radio Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fixed Mast Antenna (Hatchback) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Backglass Antenna (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-63
4-64
4-65
4-65
4-66
4-66
Instrument Panel Overview
Tilt Wheel
The tilt wheel lever is
located under the steering
column, slightly to the left.
Hazard Warning Flashers
The hazard warning flasher button is located to the right
of the climate control system on the sedan.
| Hazard Warning Flasher:
Press to make the front
and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off. This warns
others that you are having trouble. Press the button
again to turn the flashers off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, the turn
signals will not work.
Horn
Press near or on the horn symbols on the steering
wheel pad to sound the horn.
To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Pull the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel up or down into a
comfortable position.
3. Pull the lever up to lock the wheel in place.
Do not adjust the tilt lever while driving.
4-3
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
An arrow on the instrument panel cluster flashes in the
direction of the turn or lane change.
Move the lever all the way up or down to signal a turn.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
G : Turn and Lane-Change Signals
3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
P : Exterior Light Control
# : Fog Lamps, if equipped
Flash-to-Pass Feature.
Information for these features is on the pages following.
4-4
Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash to
signal a lane change. Hold it there until the lane change
is completed.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
The lever returns to its starting position whenever it is
released.
Push the turn signal lever away from you to turn the
high beams on.
If after signaling a turn or a lane change the arrow
flashes rapidly or does not come on, a signal bulb may
be burned out.
This instrument panel cluster light 3 comes on while
the high beams are on and the ignition is turned to
ON/RUN.
Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb is not burned out,
check the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on
page 6‑87.
Pull the lever towards you to return to low beams.
The headlamps must be on for this feature to work.
Flash-to-Pass
This feature is used to signal to the vehicle ahead that
you want to pass.
Pull the turn signal/multifunction lever towards you until
the high-beam headlamps come on, then release the
lever to turn them off.
4-5
Windshield Wipers
Hatchback shown
Sedan shown
The lever is located on the right side of the steering
column. The ignition must be turned to ON/RUN to
operate the windshield wipers.
Move the lever to one of the following positions:
HI (High Speed): Fast wipes.
LO (Low Speed): Slow wipes.
INT (Intermittent): Move to this position for a delayed
wiping cycle. Turn the band on the windshield wiper
toward FAST or SLOW for a shorter or longer delay
between wipes. The wiper speed can only be adjusted
when the lever is in the INT position.
OFF: Turns the windshield wipers off.
4-6
Misting Function
Windshield Washer
Move the lever toward INT for a single wiping cycle.
Hold it there until the windshield wipers start; then let
go. The windshield wipers will stop after one wipe.
If more wipes are needed, hold the band toward INT
longer.
To use this feature, the ignition must be turned to
ON/RUN. Pull the windshield washer/wiper lever toward
you to spray washer fluid on the windshield.
Clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using
them. If frozen to the windshield, carefully loosen or
thaw them. Damaged wiper blades should be replaced.
See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement on
page 6‑50.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wipers. A circuit
breaker stops them until the motor cools.
The spray continues until the lever is released. The
wipers will run a few times and either stop or will
resume at the speed being used previously. See
Windshield Washer Fluid on page 6‑33 for information
on filling the windshield washer fluid.
{ WARNING:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer until
the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your
vision.
4-7
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
{ WARNING:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer until
the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your
vision.
Cruise Control
For vehicles with cruise control, a speed of about
39 km/h (24 mph) or more can be maintained without
keeping your foot on the accelerator. Cruise control
does not work at speeds below 39 km/h (24 mph).
When the brakes are applied, or the clutch pedal if you
have a manual transmission, the cruise control turns off.
{ WARNING:
The vehicle may have a rear window wiper/washer.
Turn the rear wiper/washer band to operate the rear
window wiper/washer.
OFF: Turns the rear window wiper/washer off.
Z : Turns the rear wiper on for intermittent wipes.
Y : Sprays washer fluid onto the rear window and the
wiper operates continuously.
The windshield washer reservoir is used for the
windshield and rear window. Check the fluid level if
either washer is not working. See Windshield Washer
Fluid on page 6‑33.
4-8
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do not
use the cruise control on winding roads or in
heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire traction
can cause excessive wheel slip, and you could
lose control. Do not use cruise control on slippery
roads.
The cruise control buttons
are located on the right
side of the steering wheel.
Setting Cruise Control
{ WARNING:
If you leave your cruise control on when you are
not using cruise, you might hit a button and go
into cruise when you do not want to. You could be
startled and even lose control. Keep the cruise
control switch off until you want to use cruise
control.
I / O (On/Off):
Press to turn the cruise control on
or off.
1. Press
RES+ (Resume/Accelerate): Press to make the
vehicle accelerate or resume to a previously set speed.
2. Accelerate to the speed desired.
SET− (Set/Coast): Press to set the speed or make the
vehicle decelerate.
I / O to turn cruise control on.
3. Press the SET− button and release it. The cruise
control light comes on in the instrument panel
cluster to show that the cruise control is on.
4. Take your foot off the accelerate pedal.
4-9
Resuming a Set Speed
If the cruise control is set to a desired speed and then
the brakes are applied, or the clutch pedal if you have a
manual transmission, the cruise control shuts off. But it
does not need to be reset.
Once the vehicle is going about 39 km/h (24 mph) or
more, briefly press the RES+ button. The vehicle
returns to the previously set speed and stays there.
If the RES+ button is held, the vehicle speed will
continue to increase until the button is released or the
brake pedal is applied. Do not hold in the RES+ button,
unless you want the vehicle to go faster.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed.
.
.
Use the accelerator pedal to get to a higher speed.
Press the SET− button, then release the button
and the accelerator pedal.
Press the RES+ button. Hold it there until the
desired speed is reached, and then release it. To
increase the vehicle speed in small amounts,
briefly press the RES+ button and then release it.
Each time this is done, the vehicle goes about
1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster.
The accelerate feature only works after the cruise
control is turned on by pressing the SET− button.
4-10
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
There are two ways to reduce the vehicle speed while
using cruise control:
.
Press the SET− button until the lower speed
desired is reached, then release it.
.
To slow down in small amounts, briefly press the
SET− button. Each time this is done, the vehicle
goes about 1.6 km/h (1 mph) slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle
speed. When you take your foot off the pedal, the
vehicle slows down to the cruise control speed set
earlier.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well the cruise control works on hills depends upon
the vehicle speed, load, and the steepness of the hills.
When going up steep hills, you might have to step on
the accelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle's speed.
When going downhill, you might have to brake or shift
to a lower gear to keep the vehicle's speed down. When
the brakes are applied the cruise control turns off.
Ending Cruise Control
The exterior lamp band has three positions:
There are two ways to turn off the cruise control:
3 (Headlamps): Turns on the headlamps, together
with the following:
.
.
Step lightly on the brake pedal, or press the clutch
pedal, if you have a manual transmission.
Press
I / O on the cruise control pad.
Erasing Speed Memory
The cruise control set speed memory is erased when
the cruise control or the ignition is turned off.
Exterior Lamps
.
Taillamps
.
License Plate Lamp
.
Instrument Panel Lights
.
Parking Lamps
The headlamps automatically turn off when the ignition
key is turned to LOCK/OFF or ACC/ACCESSORY.
; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the parking lamps,
together with the taillamps, license plate lamp, and
instrument panel lights.
OFF: Turns all the lamps off, except the Daytime
Running Lamps (DRL).
Uplevel shown, Base similar
The lever on the left side of the steering column
operates the exterior lamps.
4-11
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.
Fully functional daytime running lamps are required on
all vehicles first sold in Canada.
The DRL system makes the headlamps come on when
the following conditions are met:
.
The ignition is on.
.
The exterior lamp band is in OFF or in the parking
lamp position.
.
The parking brake is released.
An indicator light on instrument panel cluster comes on
when the DRL system is on.
When the DRL system is on, the taillamps, sidemarker
lamps, parking lamps and instrument panel lights do not
come on unless the exterior lamps control is turned to
the parking lamp or headlamp position.
The DRL system turns off when one of the following
conditions are met:
.
The ignition is off.
.
The parking brake is on.
.
The high-beam headlamps are on.
.
The low-beam headlamps are on.
.
The flash-to-pass feature is used.
The regular headlamp system should be used when
needed.
Fog Lamps
For vehicles with fog lamps, they are controlled by the
# band located on the middle of the turn signal/
multifunction lever.
To use the fog lamps, the ignition must be turned to
ON/RUN and the low-beam headlamps or parking
lamps must be on.
Turn the band to # to turn the fog lamps on. The band
automatically returns to its starting position when
released. The fog lamp indicator light comes on in the
instrument panel cluster. See Fog Lamp Light on
page 4‑35.
To turn the fog lamps off, turn the band to
fog lamp indicator light will go off.
# again. The
The fog lamps will also turn off when the high-beam
headlamps are turned on. When the high-beam
headlamps are turned off, the fog lamps will turn on
again.
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to
be on along with the fog lamps.
4-12
Instrument Panel Brightness
Dome Lamp
This feature controls the brightness of the instrument
panel lights.
The vehicle has a dome lamp located in the overhead
console.
Move the switch to the following positions:
ON: The light comes on and stays on.
O (Door): The light comes on when a door is opened.
The light turns off when all the doors are closed.
OFF: The light remains off even when a door is
opened.
Be sure all doors and trunk lid or hatch are completely
closed or the battery may drain.
Inadvertent Power Battery Saver
The thumbwheel for this feature is located on the
instrument panel to the left of the steering column. Turn
the thumbwheel to brighten or dim the lights.
This feature is designed to protect the vehicle's battery
against drainage. If the exterior lamps control is left in
the ; or 2 position, the key is removed and the driver
door is opened, the lights will turn off automatically.
If the key is removed and the driver door is opened
while the dome lamp is on, the dome lamp will not turn
off automatically.
4-13
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
Accessory power outlets can be used to plug in
auxiliary electrical equipment, such as a cellular phone.
The accessory power outlet is located next to the
parking brake on the center console.
To use the accessory power outlet, remove the
protective cap. When not in use, always cover the outlet
with the protective cap. The accessory power outlet is
operational when the ignition is turned to ACC/
ACCESSORY or ON/RUN.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on for
extended periods will drain the battery. Always turn
off electrical equipment when not in use and do not
plug in equipment that exceeds the
maximum amperage rating.
4-14
Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible
with the accessory power outlet and could result in
blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a
problem, see your dealer/retailer for additional
information on accessory power outlets.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to the
vehicle can damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not use
equipment exceeding maximum amperage rating of
20 amperes. Check with your dealer/retailer before
adding electrical equipment.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the
proper installation instructions included with the
equipment.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not
hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket
from the plug because the power outlets are
designed for accessory power plugs only.
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter
Clock
The ashtray is located at the lower part of the center
instrument panel. To remove the front ashtray for
cleaning, open the ashtray fully, press in the retaining
tab and pull the bin out.
There is a digital clock located in the center of the
instrument panel, above the center air outlets. When the
ignition is turned to ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, the
time is displayed in the digital clock. There are three
buttons for adjusting the digital clock:
Notice: If papers, pins, or other flammable items are
put in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other smoking
materials could ignite them and possibly damage
the vehicle. Never put flammable items in the
ashtray.
The cigarette lighter is located to the right of the
front ashtray. To use it, turn the ignition to
ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, push the cigarette
lighter in all the way and let go. When it is ready,
it will pop back out.
Electrical accessories may not be compatible with the
cigarette lighter and could result in blown vehicle or
adapter fuses. If you experience a problem see your
dealer/retailer for additional information.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating will not allow the lighter to back away from
the heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating may occur to the lighter or heating
element. Do not hold a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating.
H (Hour): Press once to go forward one hour. To go
forward more than one hour, press and hold the button
until the correct hour is reached.
M (Minute): Press once to go forward one minute. To go
forward more than one minute, press and hold the
button until the correct minute is reached.
S (Set): Press to reset the time to the nearest hour.
For example, if the set button is pressed while the time
is between 8:00 and 8:29, the display is set to 8:00.
If this button is pressed while the time is between
8:30 and 8:59, the display is set to 9:00.
After disconnecting the battery or replacing the fuse,
reset the clock.
4-15
Climate Controls
Climate Control System
For vehicles with these climate control systems, the
heating, cooling, and ventilation can be controlled for
the vehicle.
Climate Control System with Heater Only
B. Fan Control
D. Rear Window
Defogger
C. Air Delivery Mode
Control
E. Outside Air/
Recirculation
A. Temperature Control
Climate Control System with Heater and Air
Conditioning
A. Temperature Control
D. Air Conditioning (A/C)
B. Fan Control
E. Recirculation
C. Air Delivery Mode
Control
F. Rear Window
Defogger
4-16
OFF: Turns the fan off.
Temperature Control: Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the
temperature of the air flowing from the system.
9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwise or counterclockwise
to increase or decrease the fan speed. The fan must be
turned on to run the air conditioning compressor.
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to change the current airflow mode.
Select from the following air delivery modes:
Y (Vent): Air is directed to the instrument panel outlets.
\ (Bi-Level): Air is divided between the instrument
panel and floor outlets.
[ (Floor): Air is directed to the floor outlets, with some
air directed to the rear outlets. Keep the area under the
front seats clear to allow the flow of air to the rear
compartment.
É (Defog): This mode clears the windows of fog or
moisture. Air is directed to the windshield, floor, and
side window outlets. When this mode is selected, the
system automatically runs the air-conditioning. To defog
the windows faster, turn the temperature control to the
warmest setting.
1 (Defrost): This mode quickly clears the windshield
of fog or frost. Air is directed to the windshield and side
window outlets. When this mode is selected, the system
automatically runs the air-conditioning. To defrost the
windows faster, turn the temperature control to the
warmest setting.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
A/C (Air Conditioning): For vehicles with air
conditioning, follow these steps to use the system.
Turn 9 to the desired speed. The air conditioning does
not operate when the fan control knob is in the off
position. Press A/C to turn the air conditioning on and
off. When A/C is pressed, an indicator light comes on to
show that the air conditioning is on.
4-17
For quick cool down on hot days, do the following:
1. Open the windows to let hot air escape.
2. Press
?.
3. Press A/C.
4. Select the coolest temperature.
5. Select the highest
9 speed.
Using these settings together for long periods of time
may cause the air inside of the vehicle to become too
dry. To prevent this from happening, after the air in the
vehicle has cooled, turn the recirculation mode off.
The air conditioning system removes moisture from the
air, so a small amount of water might drip under the
vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine. This
is normal.
? (Recirculation): This mode recirculates and helps
to quickly cool the air inside the vehicle. It can be used
to prevent outside air and odors from entering the
vehicle.
4-18
For vehicles with a recirculation button, press the button
to turn the recirculation mode on. An indicator light
comes on to show that the recirculation is on. Press the
button again to return to outside air mode.
For vehicles with a lever, move the lever to choose the
recirculation mode.
Using the recirculation mode for extended periods may
cause the windows to fog. If this happens, select the
defrost mode.
: (Outside Air): This mode brings outside air into the
vehicle.
For vehicles with a recirculation button, press the button
until the recirculation mode is turned off. The vehicle
then returns to the outside air mode.
For vehicles with a lever, move the lever to choose the
outside air mode.
Rear Window and Outside Mirror
Defogger
For vehicles with a rear window and outside mirror
defogger, they only work when the ignition is turned to
ON/RUN.
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog or frost from the rear window.
< (Rear Window Defogger): Press to turn the rear
window and outside mirror defogger on or off. An
indicator light comes on to show that the feature is on.
If the vehicle does not have air conditioning, the rear
window defogger may turn off about 10 minutes after
the button is pressed. If it remains on, it can be turned
off by pressing < again or by turning off the engine.
If the vehicle has air conditioning, the rear window
defogger turns off about 10 minutes after the button is
pressed. The defogger can also be turned off by turning
the engine off.
Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the inside of
the rear window. If you do, you could cut or damage
the warming grid, and the repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not attach a
temporary vehicle license, tape, a decal or anything
similar to the defogger grid.
Outlet Adjustment
To open an outlet, press on its cover. Turn the cover to
change the direction of the airflow.
Operation Tips
.
Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air
inlets at the base of the windshield that may block
the flow of air into the vehicle.
.
Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the system.
.
Keep the path under the front seats clear of
objects to help circulate the air inside of the vehicle
more effectively.
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
For vehicles with a passenger compartment air filter, it
is located behind the glove box. It can be accessed
after removing the glove box from its housing.
Pollen and dust are removed by the filter. The filter
should be replaced as part of routine scheduled
maintenance. For a replacement filter see your dealer/
retailer. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 7‑3 for
replacement intervals.
4-19
To change the passenger compartment air filter, use the
following steps:
3. Remove the filter cover by pressing in on the
bottom retaining tab and pulling the cover down.
1. Open the glove box halfway down.
2. Grip the glove box by both the upper and lower
sides and pull it out of its housing.
4-20
Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Indicators
Warning lights and gauges can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an
expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to the
warning lights and gauges could prevent injury.
Warning lights come on when there might be or there is
a problem with one of the vehicle's functions. Some
warning lights come on briefly when the engine is
started to indicate they are working.
4. Replace the air conditioner filter.
5. View the air flow arrows on the filter before
installing to ensure the filter is installed correctly.
Gauges can indicate when there might be or there is a
problem with one of the vehicle's functions. Often
gauges and warning lights work together to indicate a
problem with the vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
while driving, or when one of the gauges shows there
could be a problem, check the section that explains
what to do. Follow this manual's advice. Waiting to do
repairs can be costly and even dangerous.
4-21
Instrument Panel Cluster
United States Manual Transmission shown, Canada and Automatic Transmission Similar
4-22
Speedometer and Odometer
Tachometer
The speedometer shows the vehicle's speed in both
kilometers per hour (km/h) and miles per hour (mph).
The odometer shows how far the vehicle has been
driven, in either kilometers (used in Canada) or miles
(used in the United States).
Trip Odometer
The trip odometer can record the number of miles, used
in the United States, or kilometers, used in Canada,
traveled for up to two trips.
Cycle between the odometer and trip odometers A
and B by pressing the reset button located in the lower
right area of the speedometer. Press the reset button to
tell how many miles or kilometers have been recorded
on either Trip A or Trip B since the trip odometer was
last set back to zero.
To reset each trip odometer to zero, press and hold the
reset button. The reset button resets only the trip
odometer that is being displayed. Each trip odometer
must be reset individually.
The tachometer displays the engine speed in
revolutions per minute (rpm).
Notice: If the engine is operated above 6,500 rpm,
the vehicle could be damaged, and the damages
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do
not operate the engine with the tachometer above
6,500 rpm.
4-23
Safety Belt Reminders
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light
Driver Safety Belt Reminder Light
For vehicles equipped with the passenger safety belt
reminder light, several seconds after the engine is
started, a chime sounds for several seconds to remind
the front passenger to buckle their safety belt. The
passenger safety belt light, located on the instrument
panel, comes on and stays on for several seconds and
then flashes for several more.
When the engine is started, a chime sounds for several
seconds to remind a driver to fasten the safety belt,
unless the driver safety belt is already buckled.
The safety belt light
comes on and stays on
for several seconds, then
flashes for several more.
This chime and light are repeated if the driver remains
unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. If the driver
safety belt is already buckled, neither the chime nor the
light comes on.
This chime and light are
repeated if the passenger
remains unbuckled and
the vehicle is in motion.
If the passenger safety belt is buckled, neither the
chime nor the light comes on.
The front passenger safety belt warning light and chime
may turn on if an object is put on the seat such as a
briefcase, handbag, grocery bag, laptop or other
electronic device. To turn off the warning light and or
chime, remove the object from the seat or buckle the
safety belt.
4-24
Airbag Readiness Light
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument
panel cluster, which shows the airbag symbol. The
system checks the airbag's electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells if there is an electrical
problem. The system check includes the airbag sensor,
the airbag modules, the wiring and the crash sensing
and diagnostic module. For more information on the
airbag system, see Airbag System on page 2‑58.
This light comes on when
the vehicle is started, and
it will flash for a few
seconds. When the light
goes out this indicates the
system is functioning
properly.
{ WARNING:
If the airbag readiness light stays on after the
vehicle is started or comes on while driving, it
means the airbag system might not be working
properly. The airbags in the vehicle might not
inflate in a crash, or they could even inflate
without a crash. To help avoid injury, have the
vehicle serviced right away.
If the airbag readiness light stays on or comes on while
driving, the airbag system may not work properly. Have
the vehicle serviced right away.
4-25
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
The vehicle has the passenger sensing system. See
Passenger Sensing System on page 2‑65 for important
safety information. The vehicle has a passenger airbag
status indicator near the clock, located in the center of
the instrument panel.
If the words PASSENGER AIRBAG ON or the on
symbol is lit on the passenger airbag status indicator, it
means that the right front passenger frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped) is
enabled (may inflate).
If the words PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF or the off
symbol is lit on the passenger airbag status indicator, it
means that the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped).
If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be a
problem with the lights or the passenger sensing
system. See your dealer/retailer for service.
United States
Canada
When the vehicle is started, the passenger airbag
status indicator will light PASSENGER AIRBAG ON and
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF or the symbol for on and
off, for several seconds as a system check. Then, after
several more seconds, the status indicator will light
either PASSENGER AIRBAG ON or PASSENGER
AIRBAG OFF, or either the on or off symbol, to let you
know the status of the right front passenger frontal and
seat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped).
4-26
{ WARNING:
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and
stays on, it means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to
yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4‑25
for more information, including important safety
information.
Charging System Light
Up-Shift Light
The vehicle may have an
up-shift light.
This light will come on briefly when the ignition is turned
on, and the engine is not running, as a check to show it
is working.
It should go out when the engine is started. If it stays
on, or comes on while driving, there may have a
problem with the electrical charging system. Have it
checked by your dealer/retailer. Driving while this light is
on could drain the battery. If a short distance must be
driven with the light on, turn off all accessories, such as
the radio and air conditioner to help reduce the drain on
the battery.
When this light comes on, shift to the next higher gear if
weather, road, and traffic conditions allow.
See Manual Transmission Operation on page 3‑26 for
more information.
4-27
Brake System Warning Light
The vehicle's hydraulic brake system is divided into two
parts. If one part is not working, the other part can still
work and stop the vehicle. For good braking, both parts
need to work.
If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem.
Have the brake system inspected right away.
{ WARNING:
The brake system might not be working properly if
the brake system warning light is on. Driving with
the brake system warning light on can lead to a
crash. If the light is still on after the vehicle has
been pulled off the road and carefully stopped,
have the vehicle towed for service.
This light should come on briefly when the ignition is
turned to ON. If it does not come on then, have it fixed
so it will be ready to warn if there is a problem.
United States
Canada
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
will also come on when the parking brake is set. The
light will stay on if the parking brake does not fully
release. If it stays on after the parking brake is fully
released, it means there is a brake problem.
If the light comes on while driving, carefully pull off the
road and stop. The pedal may be harder to push or may
go closer to the floor. It may take longer to stop. If the
light is still on, have the vehicle towed for service. See
Towing Your Vehicle on page 5‑21.
4-28
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light
For vehicles with the
Antilock Brake System
(ABS), this light comes on
briefly when the engine is
started.
If the light stays on, turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF or if
the light comes on, stop as soon as possible and turn
the ignition off. Then start the engine again to reset the
system. If the light still stays on, or comes on again
while driving, the vehicle needs service. See your
dealer/retailer. If the regular brake system warning light
is not on, the brakes will still work, but the antilock
brakes will not work. If the regular brake system
warning light is also on, the antilock brakes will not work
and there is a problem with the regular brakes. See
Brake System Warning Light on page 4‑28.
Hold Mode Light
If the vehicle has this
feature, this light comes
on when the hold mode is
active.
If the HOLD mode light flashes, have the vehicle
checked. See “Hold Mode” under Automatic
Transmission Operation on page 3‑23 for more
information.
The ABS warning light will come on briefly when the
ignition is turned to ON/RUN. This is normal. If the light
does not come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready
to warn if there is a problem.
4-29
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge
Tire Pressure Light
For vehicles with the tire
pressure monitoring
system, this light comes
on briefly when the engine
is started.
It provides information about tire pressures and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System.
United States
Canada
The vehicle has an engine coolant temperature gauge.
With the ignition turned to ON/RUN, this gauge shows
the engine coolant temperature.
If the gauge pointer moves into the red area, the engine
is too hot. It means that the engine coolant has
overheated.
If the vehicle has been operating under normal driving
conditions, pull off the road, stop the vehicle and turn off
the engine as soon as possible.
See Engine Overheating on page 6‑30.
4-30
When the Light is On Steady
This indicates that one or more of the tires are
significantly underinflated.
Stop and check the tires as soon as it is safe to do, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. See Tires on
page 6‑51 for more information.
When the Light Flashes First and Then is
On Steady
This indicates that there may be a problem with the Tire
Pressure Monitor System. The light flashes for about a
minute and then stays on steady for the remainder of
the ignition cycle. This sequence will repeat with every
ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure Monitor System on
page 6‑59 for more information.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
A computer system called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) monitors operation of
the fuel, ignition, and emission control systems.
It makes sure that emissions are at acceptable levels
for the life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment.
This light comes on when
the ignition is on, but the
engine is not running, as
a check to show it is
working. If it does not,
have the vehicle serviced
by your dealer/retailer.
If the check engine light comes on and stays on, while
the engine is running, this indicates that there is an
OBD II problem and service is required.
Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before
any problem is apparent. Heeding the light can prevent
more serious damage to the vehicle. This system
assists the service technician in correctly diagnosing
any malfunction.
Notice: If the vehicle is continually driven with this
light on, after a while, the emission controls might
not work as well, the vehicle's fuel economy might
not be as good, and the engine might not run as
smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that
might not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of the
vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with
other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect the vehicle's emission
controls and can cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty. This
could also result in a failure to pass a required
Emission Inspection/Maintenance test. See
Accessories and Modifications on page 6‑4.
This light comes on during a malfunction in one of
two ways:
Light Flashing: A misfire condition has been detected.
A misfire increases vehicle emissions and could
damage the emission control system on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required.
4-31
The following can prevent more serious damage to the
vehicle:
.
Reduce vehicle speed.
.
Avoid hard accelerations.
.
Avoid steep uphill grades.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park the vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds, and restart
the engine. If the light is still flashing, follow the
previous steps and see your dealer/retailer for service
as soon as possible.
Light On Steady: An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required.
An emission system malfunction might be corrected by
doing the following:
.
4-32
Make sure the fuel cap is fully installed. See Filling
the Tank on page 6‑8. The diagnostic system
can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap
allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few
driving trips with the cap properly installed should
turn the light off.
.
If the vehicle has been driven through a deep
puddle of water, the vehicle's electrical system
might be wet. The condition is usually corrected
when the electrical system dries out. A few driving
trips should turn the light off.
.
Make sure to fuel the vehicle with quality fuel. Poor
fuel quality causes the engine not to run as
efficiently as designed and may cause: stalling
after start-up, stalling when the vehicle is changed
into gear, misfiring, hesitation on acceleration,
or stumbling on acceleration. These conditions
might go away once the engine is warmed up.
If one or more of these conditions occurs, change
the fuel brand used. It will require at least one full
tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
See Gasoline Octane on page 6‑6.
If none of the above have made the light turn off, have
your dealer/retailer check the vehicle. The dealer/
retailer has the proper test equipment and diagnostic
tools to fix any mechanical or electrical problems that
might have developed.
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
might begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on the vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent getting a vehicle registration.
Oil Pressure Light
If the vehicle has low
engine oil pressure, this
light will stay on after the
engine is started, or come
on while driving.
Here are some things to know to help the vehicle pass
an inspection:
.
.
The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
check engine light is on with the engine running,
or if the key is in the ON/RUN and the light is
not on.
The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
OBD II (on-board diagnostic) system determines
that critical emission control systems have not
been completely diagnosed by the system. The
vehicle would be considered not ready for
inspection. This can happen if the battery has
recently been replaced or if the battery has run
down. The diagnostic system is designed to
evaluate critical emission control systems during
normal driving. This can take several days of
routine driving. If this has been done and the
vehicle still does not pass the inspection for lack of
OBD II system readiness, your dealer/retailer can
prepare the vehicle for inspection.
This indicates that the engine is not receiving enough
oil. The engine could be low on oil, or could have some
other oil problem. Have it fixed immediately by your
dealer/retailer.
4-33
The oil light could also come on in three other
situations:
.
When the ignition is on but the engine is not
running, the light will come on as a test to show it
is working. The light will go out when the ignition is
turned on. If it does not come on with the ignition
on, there may be a problem with the fuse or bulb.
Have it fixed right away.
.
If the vehicle comes to a hard stop, the light may
come on for a moment. This is normal.
{ WARNING:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. The
engine can become so hot that it catches fire.
Someone could be burned. Check the oil as soon
as possible and have the vehicle serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance can
damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Always follow the
maintenance schedule in this manual for changing
engine oil.
4-34
Change Engine Oil Light
The vehicle may have an engine oil life system that
indicates when the oil needs to be changed.
When the change engine oil light comes on, it means
that the engine oil needs to be changed.
Once the engine oil has been changed, the engine oil
life system must be reset. After reset, the change
engine oil light goes out.
See Engine Oil Life System on page 6‑18, Scheduled
Maintenance on page 7‑3 and Engine Oil on
page 6‑15 for more information.
Fog Lamp Light
Highbeam On Light
For vehicles with this
feature, the fog lamps
light will come on when
the fog lamps are in use.
This light comes on when
the high-beam headlamps
are in use.
The light will go out when the fog lamps are turned off.
See Fog Lamps on page 4‑12 for more information.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 4‑5
for more information.
Cruise Control Light
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Indicator Light
If the vehicle has cruise
control, this light comes
on whenever the cruise
control is set
The light will go out when the cruise control is turned
off. See Cruise Control on page 4‑8 for more
information.
This light turns on
whenever the Daytime
Running Lamps are on.
See Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) on page 4‑12 for
more information.
4-35
Door Ajar Light
Fuel Gauge
The door ajar light comes
on and stays on until all
doors, trunk and liftgate
are closed and completely
latched.
If the key is in the ignition while the driver's door is
open, a warning chime also sounds.
United States
Canada
The fuel gauge indicates about how much fuel is left
when the ignition is turned to ON/RUN.
When the tank nears empty, the low fuel warning light
will come on. There is still a little fuel left, but the
vehicle's fuel tank should be filled soon. See Low Fuel
Warning Light on page 4‑37 for more information.
An arrow on the fuel gauge indicates the side of the
vehicle the fuel door is located.
4-36
Here are four things that some owners ask about. None
of these show a problem with the fuel gauge:
.
At the service station, the gas pump shuts off
before the gauge reads full.
.
It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
gauge indicated. For example, the gauge may
have indicated the tank was half full, but it actually
took a little more or less than half the tank's
capacity to fill the tank.
.
The indicator moves a little when turning a corner
or speeding up.
.
The gauge goes back to empty when the ignition is
turned off.
Low Fuel Warning Light
This light comes on when
the vehicle is low on fuel.
The low fuel warning light comes on when there is
approximately 1.7 gallons (6.0 liters) of fuel remaining in
the tank.
To turn the light off, add fuel to the fuel tank. See Filling
the Tank on page 6‑8.
4-37
Trip Computer
The vehicle may have trip computer, it provides the
driver with driving information such as the driving
distance for the remaining fuel, outside temperature,
average fuel economy, and driving time.
The trip computer button is located in the lower right
area of the tachometer. Each time you press it, the
display cycles through the available choices.
Range for Remaining Fuel
This display shows the
approximate number of
remaining miles the
vehicle can be driven
without refueling.
The minimum display for the range is 45 miles
(72 km). Once the minimum display range is under
45 miles (72 km), you will see dashes on the display.
The fuel range estimate is based on an average of
the vehicle's fuel economy over recent driving history
and the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank.
This estimate will change if driving conditions change.
4-38
For example, if driving in traffic and making frequent
stops, this display may read one number, but if the
vehicle is driven on a freeway, the number may change
even though the same amount of fuel is in the fuel tank.
This is because different driving conditions produce
different fuel economies. Generally, freeway driving
produces better fuel economy than city driving.
Outside Temperature
This display shows the approximate outside
temperature.
Average Fuel Economy
This display shows the
approximate average
miles per gallon (mpg).
This number is calculated based on the number of mpg
recorded since the last time this menu item was reset.
To reset the average fuel economy press and hold the
trip computer button.
Driving Time
This display can be used
as a timer.
The display will show the amount of time that has
passed since the timer was last reset. The timer is only
running while the vehicle is moving. To reset the driving
time press and hold the trip computer button.
Audio System(s)
Determine which radio the vehicle has and read the
following pages to become familiar with its features.
This system provides access to many audio and non
audio listings.
To minimize taking your eyes off the road while driving,
do the following while the vehicle is parked:
.
Become familiar with the operation and controls of
the audio system.
.
Set up the tone, speaker adjustments, and preset
radio stations.
For more information, see Defensive Driving on
page 5‑2.
Notice: Contact your dealer/retailer before adding
any equipment.
Adding audio or communication equipment could
interfere with the operation of the vehicle's engine,
radio, or other systems, and could damage them.
Follow federal rules covering mobile radio and
telephone equipment.
{ WARNING:
Taking your eyes off the road for extended periods
could cause a crash resulting in injury or death to
you or others. Do not give extended attention to
entertainment tasks while driving.
4-39
AM-FM Radio
Finding a Station
BAND: Press to choose FM, AM, or XM™ (if
equipped). The display will show the selection.
u SEEK: Press to seek the next radio station with a
strong signal in the selected band.
t SEEK:
Press to seek the previous radio station with
a strong signal in the selected band.
[ TUNE: Press to go to the next station manually.
r TUNE: Press to go to the previous station manually.
SCAN: Press to scan radio stations. The radio goes to
a station, plays for a few seconds, then goes to the next
station. Press this button again to stop scanning.
The radio only scans stations with a strong signal in the
selected band.
Playing the Radio
O (Power/Volume) : Press and release to turn the
system on. Press and hold this knob for more than
two seconds to turn the system off.
Turn to increase or decrease the volume.
When the system is on, press and release O to mute
the system. Press and release O again to turn the
sound back on.
4-40
AST (Automatic Store): Twelve preset stations with
the strongest reception in the area can be automatically
stored. The radio will only scan stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected AM or FM band. If the
Automatic Store function is started in the FM band, only
FM stations are stored in preset pages A1 and A2. If the
Automatic Store function is started in the AM band, only
AM stations are stored in A1 and A2. A combination of
AM, FM and XM (if equipped) stations can be stored
manually into the other four favorite pages.
To use Automatic Store:
1. Press and hold AST to use Auto Store mode.
2. Press the pushbutton below the ON tab on the
radio display.
3. Automatic Store searches for radio stations with a
strong signal and automatically set presets A1 and
A2 with new stations.
4. After all stations are set, press the pushbutton
below the arrow tab on the radio display to return
to the main radio screen
To reset the automatically stored radio stations, press
and hold AST. Then press the pushbutton below the
RESE tab on the radio display. If no stations are stored
on preset pages A1 and A2, the RESE option does not
appear in the radio display. When the Automatic Store
function is used, any stations that were previously set
will be deleted and replaced with new stations.
Storing a Radio Station
Drivers are encouraged to set up radio station favorites
while the vehicle is in P (Park). Tune to favorite stations
using the pushbuttons, favorites button, and steering
wheel controls. See Defensive Driving on page 5‑2.
A maximum of 36 stations can be programmed as
favorites using the six pushbuttons positioned below the
radio station frequency labels and by using the radio
favorites page button (FAV button). Press the FAV
button to go through up to six pages of favorites, each
having six favorite stations available per page.
If Automatic Store is used, then four pages of favorites
are available. Each page of favorites can contain any
combination of AM, FM, or XM™ (if equipped) stations.
To store a station as a favorite:
1. Tune in the desired station.
2. Press and release the FAV button to display the
page where the station is to be stored.
3. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until a beep sounds. When the
pushbutton is pressed and released, the station
that was set will return.
4. Repeat the Steps 1 through 3 for each radio
station to be stored as a favorite.
4-41
To setup the number of favorites pages:
1. Press and hold FAV until the radio setup menu
displays.
2. Select the desired number of favorites pages by
pressing the pushbutton located below the
displayed page numbers.
3. Press FAV to return to the original main radio
screen showing the radio station frequency tabs
and to begin the process of programming favorites
for the chosen amount of numbered pages.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Mid/Treble)
SOUND (Bass/Mid/Treble): Press to adjust the bass,
midrange, or treble.
Adjusting the Bass
To adjust the bass:
1. Press SOUND.
2. Press the pushbutton below the Bass tab on the
display.
3. Turn
O to adjust the setting.
4. The settings are saved after five seconds.
4-42
Adjusting the Midrange
To adjust the midrange:
1. Press SOUND.
2. Press the pushbutton below the Mid tab on the
display.
3. Turn
O to adjust the setting.
4. The settings are saved after five seconds.
Adjusting the Treble
To adjust the treble:
1. Press SOUND.
2. Press the pushbutton below the Treb tab on the
display.
3. Turn
O to adjust the setting.
4. The settings are saved after five seconds.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
Setting the EQ
SOUND (Balance/Fade): Press to adjust the balance
or fade.
SOUND (Equalization): Press to select an equalization
setting.
Adjusting the Balance
Setting the EQ
To adjust the balance:
To set the EQ:
1. Press SOUND.
1. Press SOUND.
2. Press the pushbutton below the Bal tab on the
display.
2. Press the pushbutton below the P.EQ tab on the
display. The Pop, Rock, Ctry, Voice, Jazz, Clas
tabs appear on the display.
3. Turn
O to adjust the setting.
4. The settings are saved after five seconds.
Adjusting the Fade
3. Press the pushbutton below the desired selection
to set the EQ. Pressing the same pushbutton again
cancels the EQ setting.
To adjust the fade:
1. Press SOUND.
2. Press the pushbutton below the Fad tab on the
display.
3. Turn
O to adjust the setting.
4. The settings are saved after five seconds.
4-43
XM Satellite Radio Service
XM is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian
provinces. XM Satellite Radio has a wide variety
of programming and commercial-free music,
coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality sound. A service
fee is required to receive the XM service. For more
information, contact XM at www.xmradio.com or call
1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and www.xmradio.ca or call
1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
Radio Messages for XM Only
See XM Radio Messages on page 4‑63 later in this
section for further detail.
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack
The radio system has a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) auxiliary input
jack located on the lower right side of the faceplate.
This is not an audio output; do not plug headphones
into the 3.5 mm (1/8 in) auxiliary input jack. An external
audio device such as an iPod®, laptop computer, MP3
player, CD changer, etc. can be connected to the
3.5 mm (1/8 in) auxiliary input jack for use as another
audio source.
4-44
Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary device
while the vehicle is in P (Park). See Defensive Driving
on page 5‑2 for more information on driver distraction.
To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm
(1/8 in) cable to the radio's 3.5 mm (1/8 in) auxiliary
input jack. When a device is connected, press the radio
AUX button to begin playing audio from the device over
the vehicle speakers.
O (Power/Volume):
Turn to adjust the volume.
Additional volume adjustments may have to be made
from the portable device if the volume is too quiet or
too loud.
AUX (Auxiliary): Press to listen to the radio while a
portable audio device is playing. Press again and the
system begins playing audio from the connected
portable audio player. If a portable audio player is not
connected, No Aux Input Device Found may display.
Radio with CD
Finding a Station
BAND: Press to choose FM, AM, or XM™
(if equipped). The display will show the selection.
u SEEK: Press to seek the next radio station with a
strong signal in the selected band.
t SEEK:
Press to seek the previous radio station with
a strong signal in the selected band.
[ TUNE: Press to go to the next station manually.
r TUNE: Press to go to the previous station manually.
SCAN/AST: Press to scan radio stations. The radio
goes to a station, plays for a few seconds, then goes to
the next station. The radio only scans stations with a
strong signal in the selected band. Press SCAN/AST
again to stop scanning.
Playing the Radio
O (Power/Volume): Press and release to turn the
Press and hold SCAN/AST to use Auto Store. The
radio only scans stations with a strong signal in the
selected band.
system on. Press and hold this knob for more than
two seconds to turn the system off.
Turn to increase or decrease the volume.
When the system is on, press and release O to mute
the system. Press and release O again to turn the
sound back on.
4-45
AST (Automatic Store): Twelve preset stations with
the strongest reception in the area can be automatically
stored. The radio will only scan stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected AM or FM band. If the
Automatic Store function is started in the FM band, only
FM stations are stored in preset pages A1 and A2. If the
Automatic Store function is started in the AM band, only
AM stations are stored in A1 and A2. A combination of
AM, FM and XM (if equipped) stations can be stored
manually into the other four favorite pages.
To use Automatic Store:
1. Press and hold SCAN/AST to use Auto
Store mode.
2. Press the pushbutton below the ON tab on the
radio display.
3. Automatic Store searches for radio stations with a
strong signal and automatically set presets A1 and
A2 with new stations.
4. After all stations are set, press the pushbutton
below the arrow tab on the radio display to return
to the main radio screen
To reset the automatically stored radio stations, press
and hold SCAN/AST. Then press the pushbutton below
the RESE tab on the radio display. If no stations are
stored on preset pages A1 and A2, the RESE option
does not appear in the radio display. When the
4-46
Automatic Store function is used, any stations that were
previously set will be deleted and replaced with new
stations.
Storing a Radio Station
Drivers are encouraged to set up radio station favorites
while the vehicle is in P (Park). Tune to favorite stations
using the pushbuttons, favorites button, and steering
wheel controls. See Defensive Driving on page 5‑2.
A maximum of 36 stations can be programmed as
favorites using the six pushbuttons positioned below the
radio station frequency labels and by using the radio
favorites page button (FAV button). Press the FAV
button to go through up to six pages of favorites, each
having six favorite stations available per page.
If Automatic Store is used, then four pages of favorites
are available. Each page of favorites can contain any
combination of AM, FM, or XM™ (if equipped) stations.
To store a station as a favorite:
1. Tune in the desired station.
2. Press and release the FAV button to display the
page where the station is to be stored.
3. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until a beep sounds. When the
pushbutton is pressed and released, the station
that was set will return.
4. Repeat the Steps 1 through 3 for each radio
station to be stored as a favorite.
To setup the number of favorites pages:
1. Press and hold FAV until the radio setup menu
displays.
2. Select the desired number of favorites pages by
pressing the pushbutton located below the
displayed page numbers.
3. Press FAV to return to the original main radio
screen showing the radio station frequency tabs
and to begin the process of programming favorites
for the chosen amount of numbered pages.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Mid/Treble)
SOUND (Bass/Mid/Treble): Press to adjust the bass,
midrange, or treble.
Adjusting the Bass
To adjust the bass:
1. Press SOUND.
Adjusting the Midrange
To adjust the midrange:
1. Press SOUND.
2. Press the pushbutton below the Mid tab on the
display.
3. Turn
O to adjust the setting.
4. The settings are saved after five seconds.
Adjusting the Treble
To adjust the treble:
1. Press SOUND.
2. Press the pushbutton below the Treb tab on the
display.
3. Turn
O to adjust the setting.
4. The settings are saved after five seconds.
2. Press the pushbutton below the Bass tab on the
display.
3. Turn
O to adjust the setting.
4. The settings are saved after five seconds.
4-47
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
Setting the EQ
SOUND (Balance/Fade): Press to adjust the balance
or fade.
SOUND (Equalization): Press to select an equalization
setting.
Adjusting the Balance
Setting the EQ
To adjust the balance:
To set the EQ:
1. Press SOUND.
1. Press SOUND.
2. Press the pushbutton below the Bal tab on the
display.
2. Press the pushbutton below the P.EQ tab on the
display. The Pop, Rock, Ctry, Voice, Jazz, Clas
tabs appear on the display.
3. Turn
O to adjust the setting.
4. The settings are saved after five seconds.
Adjusting the Fade
To adjust the fade:
1. Press SOUND.
2. Press the pushbutton below the Fad tab on the
display.
3. Turn
O to adjust the setting.
4. The settings are saved after five seconds.
4-48
3. Press the pushbutton below the desired selection
to set the EQ. Pressing the same pushbutton again
cancels the EQ setting.
XM Satellite Radio Service
XM is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian
provinces. XM Satellite Radio has a wide variety of
programming and commercial-free music,
coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality sound. A service
fee is required to receive the XM service. For more
information, contact XM at www.xmradio.com or call
1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and www.xmradio.ca or call
1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
Radio Messages for XM Only
See XM Radio Messages on page 4‑63 later in this
section for further detail.
Playing a CD
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player pulls it in and the CD begins playing. A CD can
be loaded while the ignition is in the OFF position.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When a CD is in the
player and the ignition is in the ON/RUN position, the
radio must be turned on before the CD will start playing.
When the ignition and radio are turned on, the CD will
start playing where it stopped, if it was the last selected
audio source.
The CD player can play the smaller 8 cm (3 in) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the smaller
CDs are loaded in the same manner.
[ TUNE (Next Track):
Press [ TUNE to go to the
next track. The track number will appear on the display.
The player will continue moving forward through the CD
with each press of [ TUNE.
r TUNE (Previous Track): Press to go to the start of
the current track. The track number will appear on the
display. The player will continue moving backward
through the CD with each press of r TUNE.
When the CD is inserted, CDP appears on the display.
As the CD is loading, LOADING appears on the display.
As each new track starts to play, the track number
displays.
4-49
BAND: Press to listen to the radio while a CD is
playing. The CD remains inside the radio for future
listening.
CD/AUX: Press to play a CD when listening to the
radio. CDP appears on the display when the CD player
has been selected. The CD symbol will appear on the
display when a CD is loaded.
Press CD/AUX while a CD is playing to pause the CD.
PAUSE flashes on the display. Press CD/AUX again to
start playing the CD.
Press CD/AUX to play a CD when listening to the audio
contents from other device (AUX mode). CDP appears
on the display when the CD player has been selected.
The CD symbol will appear on the display when a CD is
loaded.
EJECT: Press to eject a CD. The CD can be ejected
when the ignition or the radio is turned off.
INFO/DISP (Information/Display): Press to display
additional text information related to the current
MP3/WMA song. A choice of additional information
such as: Song Title , Album Title, Artist, Bit rate may
appear.
4-50
RPT (Repeat): Press the pushbutton under the RPT tab
on the display to repeat the current track, RPT appears
on the display. Press the pushbutton again to stop
repeat.
RDM (Random): Press the pushbutton below the RDM
tab on the display to play tracks in random, rather than
sequential order, RDM appears on the display. Press
the pushbutton again to stop random play.
INT (Scan): Press the pushbutton below the INT tab on
the display to listen to the first few seconds of each
track on the CD, INTRO appears on the display. Press
the pushbutton again to stop scanning and the current
track begins to play.
Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R Disc
The radio has the MP3/WMA CD-R disc capability. For
more information, see Using an MP3 on page 4‑61
later in this section.
CD Messages
Care of CDs
CHECK CD: If this message displays and/or the CD
comes out, it could be for one of the following reasons:
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the
quality of the music that has been recorded, and the
way the CD-R or CD-RW has been handled. Handle
them carefully. Store CD-R(s) in their original cases or
other protective cases and away from direct sunlight
and dust. The CD player scans the bottom surface of
the disc. If the surface of a CD is damaged, such as
cracked, broken, or scratched, the CD does not play
properly or not at all. Do not touch the bottom side of a
CD while handling it; this could damage the surface.
Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of
the hole and the outer edge.
.
It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
.
The road is very rough. When the road becomes
smoother, the CD should play.
.
The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
.
The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
.
The format of the CD might not be compatible. See
Using an MP3 on page 4‑61 later in this section.
.
There could have been a problem while burning
the CD.
.
The label could be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If the surface of a CD is soiled, clean it with a soft, lint
free cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild,
neutral detergent solution mixed with water. Make sure
the wiping process starts from the center to the edge.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it down and provide it
to your dealer/retailer when reporting the problem.
4-51
Care of the CD Player
Do not add labels to a CD, it could get caught in the CD
player. Use a marking pen to write on the top of the CD
if a description is needed.
Do not use CD lens cleaners, they could damage the
CD player.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than one
CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an attempt
is made to play scratched or damaged CDs, the CD
player could be damaged. While using the CD
player, use only CDs in good condition without any
label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” earlier in this
section.
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack
The radio system has a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) auxiliary input
jack located on the lower right side of the faceplate.
This is not an audio output; do not plug the headphone
set into the front auxiliary input jack. An external audio
device such as an iPod, laptop computer, MP3 player,
CD changer, etc. can be connected to the 3.5 mm
(1/8 in) auxiliary input jack for use as another audio
source.
4-52
Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary device
while the vehicle is in P (Park). See Defensive Driving
on page 5‑2 for more information on driver distraction.
To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm
(1/8 in) cable to the radio's front auxiliary input jack.
When a device is connected, press the radio CD/AUX
button to begin playing audio from the device over the
vehicle speakers.
O (Power/Volume):
Turn to adjust the volume.
Additional volume adjustments may have to be made
from the portable device if the volume is too quiet or
too loud.
CD/AUX (Auxiliary): Press to play a CD while a
portable audio device is playing. Press CD/AUX a
second time for the system to begin playing audio from
the connected portable audio player. The portable audio
device continues playing until it is turned off.
Radio with Six-Disc CD
Finding a Station
BAND: Press to choose FM, AM, or XM™
(if equipped). The display will show the selection.
u SEEK: Press to seek the next radio station with a
strong signal in the selected band.
t SEEK:
Press to seek the previous radio station with
a strong signal in the selected band.
[ TUNE: Press to go to the next station manually.
r TUNE: Press to go to the previous station manually.
SCAN/AST: Press to scan radio stations. The radio
goes to a station, plays for a few seconds, then goes to
the next station. The radio only scans stations with a
strong signal in the selected band. Press SCAN/AST
again to stop scanning.
Playing the Radio
O (Power/Volume): Press and release to turn the
Press and hold SCAN/AST to use Auto Store. The radio
only scans stations with a strong signal in the
selected band.
system on. Press and hold this knob for more than
two seconds to turn the system off.
Turn to increase or decrease the volume.
When the system is on, press and release O to mute
the system. Press and release O again to turn the
sound back on.
4-53
AST (Automatic Store): Twelve preset stations with
the strongest reception in the area can be automatically
stored. The radio will only scan stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected AM or FM band. If the
Automatic Store function is started in the FM band, only
FM stations are stored in preset pages A1 and A2. If the
Automatic Store function is started in the AM band, only
AM stations are stored in A1 and A2. A combination of
AM, FM and XM (if equipped) stations can be stored
manually into the other four favorite pages.
To use Automatic Store:
1. Press and hold SCAN/AST to use Auto
Store mode.
2. Press the pushbutton below the ON tab on the
radio display.
3. Automatic Store searches for radio stations with a
strong signal and automatically set presets A1 and
A2 with new stations.
4. After all stations are set, press the pushbutton
below the arrow tab on the radio display to return
to the main radio screen
To reset the automatically stored radio stations, press
and hold SCAN/AST. Then press the pushbutton below
the RESE tab on the radio display. If no stations are
stored on preset pages A1 and A2, the RESE option
does not appear in the radio display. When the
4-54
Automatic Store function is used, any stations that were
previously set will be deleted and replaced with new
stations.
Storing a Radio Station
Drivers are encouraged to set up radio station favorites
while the vehicle is in P (Park). Tune to favorite stations
using the pushbuttons, favorites button, and steering
wheel controls. See Defensive Driving on page 5‑2.
A maximum of 36 stations can be programmed as
favorites using the six pushbuttons positioned below the
radio station frequency labels and by using the radio
favorites page button (FAV button). Press the FAV
button to go through up to six pages of favorites, each
having six favorite stations available per page.
If Automatic Store is used, then four pages of favorites
are available. Each page of favorites can contain any
combination of AM, FM, or XM™ (if equipped) stations.
To store a station as a favorite:
1. Tune in the desired station.
2. Press and release the FAV button to display the
page where the station is to be stored.
3. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until a beep sounds. When the
pushbutton is pressed and released, the station
that was set will return.
4. Repeat the Steps 1 through 3 for each radio
station to be stored as a favorite.
To setup the number of favorites pages:
1. Press and hold FAV until the radio setup menu
displays.
2. Select the desired number of favorites pages by
pressing the pushbutton located below the
displayed page numbers.
3. Press FAV to return to the original main radio
screen showing the radio station frequency tabs
and to begin the process of programming favorites
for the chosen amount of numbered pages.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Mid/Treble)
SOUND (Bass/Mid/Treble): Press to adjust the bass,
midrange, or treble.
Adjusting the Bass
To adjust the bass:
1. Press SOUND.
Adjusting the Midrange
To adjust the midrange:
1. Press SOUND.
2. Press the pushbutton below the Mid tab on the
display.
3. Turn
O to adjust the setting.
4. The settings are saved after five seconds.
Adjusting the Treble
To adjust the treble:
1. Press SOUND.
2. Press the pushbutton below the Treb tab on the
display.
3. Turn
O to adjust the setting.
4. The settings are saved after five seconds.
2. Press the pushbutton below the Bass tab on the
display.
3. Turn
O to adjust the setting.
4. The settings are saved after five seconds.
4-55
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
Setting the EQ
SOUND (Balance/Fade): Press to adjust the balance
or fade.
SOUND (Equalization): Press to select an equalization
setting.
Adjusting the Balance
Setting the EQ
To adjust the balance:
To set the EQ:
1. Press SOUND.
1. Press SOUND.
2. Press the pushbutton below the Bal tab on the
display.
2. Press the pushbutton below the P.EQ tab on the
display. The Pop, Rock, Ctry, Voice, Jazz, Clas
tabs appear on the display.
3. Turn
O to adjust the setting.
4. The settings are saved after five seconds.
Adjusting the Fade
To adjust the fade:
1. Press SOUND.
2. Press the pushbutton below the Fad tab on the
display.
3. Turn
O to adjust the setting.
4. The settings are saved after five seconds.
4-56
3. Press the pushbutton below the desired selection
to set the EQ. Pressing the same pushbutton again
cancels the EQ setting.
XM Satellite Radio Service
XM is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian
provinces. XM Satellite Radio has a wide variety
of programming and commercial-free music,
coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality sound. A service
fee is required to receive the XM service. For more
information, contact XM at www.xmradio.com or call
1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and www.xmradio.ca or call
1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
Radio Messages for XM Only
See XM Radio Messages on page 4‑63 later in this
section for further detail.
Playing a CD(s)
Loading a CD(s)
The CD player can hold up to six CDs. As each CD is
inserted, CDP will appear on the display and as each
CD is loading. File check will appear on the display.
Once playback begins, the track and track number will
appear on the display.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When a CD is in the
player and the ignition is in the ON/RUN position, the
radio must be turned on before the CD will start playing.
When the ignition and radio are turned on, the CD will
start playing where it stopped, if it was the last selected
audio source.
The CD player can play the smaller 8 cm (3 in) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the smaller
CDs are loaded in the same manner.
To load a single CD into the CD player:
1. Press the LOAD button, a message to select a slot
number from 1 to 6 appears.
2. Press the desired slot number. Wait for the
message to insert the disc.
3. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player will pull the CD in.
To insert multiple CDs:
1. Press and hold the LOAD button for two seconds.
A beep sounds and a message to load multiple
discs appears.
2. Follow the displayed instruction on when to insert
the discs. The CD player takes up to six CDs.
3. Press the LOAD button again to cancel loading
more CDs.
4-57
LOAD: Press to load CDs into the CD player.
[ TUNE (Next Track):
Press [ TUNE to go to the
next track. The track number will appear on the display.
The player will continue moving forward through the CD
with each press of [ TUNE.
r TUNE (Previous Track):
Press to go to the start of
the current track. The track number will appear on the
display. The player will continue moving backward
through the CD with each press of r TUNE.
DSC − (Previous CDC): Press to go back to the start of
the previous CDC.
DSC + (Next CDC): Press to go forward to the start of
the next CDC.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio while a CD is
playing. The CD remains inside the radio for future
listening.
CD/AUX: Press to play a CD when listening to the
radio. CDC appears on the display when the CD player
has been selected. The CD symbol will appear on the
display when a CD is loaded.
Press CD/AUX while a CD is playing to pause the CD.
PAUSE flashes on the display. Press CD/AUX again to
start playing the CD.
4-58
Press CD/AUX to play a CD when listening to the audio
contents from other device (AUX mode). CDC appears
on the display when the CD player has been selected.
The CD symbol will appear on the display when a CD is
loaded.
EJECT: Press to eject a CD. Press and hold to eject all
CDs. The CDs can be ejected when the ignition or the
radio is turned off.
INFO/DISP (Information/Display): Press to display
additional text information related to the current MP3/
WMA song. A choice of additional information such as:
Song Title , Album Title, Artist, Bit rate may appear.
RPT (Repeat): Press the pushbutton under the RPT tab
on the display to repeat the current track, RPT appears
on the display. Press the pushbutton again to stop
repeat.
RDM (Random): Press the pushbutton below the RDM
tab on the display to play tracks in random, rather than
sequential order, RDM appears on the display. Press
the pushbutton again to stop random play. To play
tracks from all CDs loaded in the CD player in random
order, press the pushbutton below the RDM tab until a
message that all discs are randomized is displayed.
Press the pushbutton again to stop random play.
INT (Scan): Press the pushbutton below the INT tab on
the display to listen to the first few seconds of each
track on each CD loaded, INTRO appears on the
display. Press the pushbutton again to stop scanning
and the current track begins to play.
Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R Disc
The radio has the MP3/WMA CD-R disc capability. For
more information, see Using an MP3 on page 4‑61
later in this section.
CD Messages
CHECK CD: If this message displays and/or the CD
comes out, it could be for one of the following reasons:
.
It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
.
The road is very rough. When the road becomes
smoother, the CD should play.
.
The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
.
The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
.
The format of the CD might not be compatible. See
Using an MP3 on page 4‑61 later in this section.
.
There could have been a problem while burning
the CD.
.
The label could be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it down and provide it
to your dealer/retailer when reporting the problem.
Care of CDs
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the
quality of the music that has been recorded, and the
way the CD-R or CD-RW has been handled. Handle
them carefully. Store CD-R(s) in their original cases or
other protective cases and away from direct sunlight
and dust. The CD player scans the bottom surface of
the disc. If the surface of a CD is damaged, such as
cracked, broken, or scratched, the CD does not play
properly or not at all. Do not touch the bottom side of a
CD while handling it; this could damage the surface.
Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of
the hole and the outer edge.
If the surface of a CD is soiled, clean it with a soft, lint
free cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild,
neutral detergent solution mixed with water. Make sure
the wiping process starts from the center to the edge.
4-59
Care of the CD Player
Do not add labels to a CD, it could get caught in the CD
player. Use a marking pen to write on the top of the CD
if a description is needed.
Do not use CD lens cleaners, they could damage the
CD player.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than one
CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an attempt
is made to play scratched or damaged CDs, the CD
player could be damaged. While using the CD
player, use only CDs in good condition without any
label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” earlier in this
section.
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack
The radio system has a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) auxiliary input
jack located on the lower right side of the faceplate.
This is not an audio output; do not plug the headphone
set into the front auxiliary input jack. An external audio
device such as an iPod, laptop computer, MP3 player,
CD changer, etc. can be connected to the 3.5 mm
(1/8 in) auxiliary input jack for use as another audio
source.
4-60
Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary device
while the vehicle is in P (Park). See Defensive Driving
on page 5‑2 for more information on driver distraction.
To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm
(1/8 in) cable to the radio's front auxiliary input jack.
When a device is connected, press the radio CD/AUX
button to begin playing audio from the device over the
vehicle speakers.
O (Power/Volume):
Turn to adjust the volume.
Additional volume adjustments may have to be made
from the portable device if the volume is too quiet or
too loud.
CD/AUX (Auxiliary): Press to play a CD while a
portable audio device is playing. Press CD/AUX a
second time for the system to begin playing audio from
the connected portable audio player. The portable audio
device continues playing until it is turned off.
Using an MP3
MP3/WMA CD-R Disc
MP3 Format
If you burn your own MP3/WMA disc on a personal
computer:
minimize the length of the file and folder names. An
MP3/WMA CD that was recorded using no file folders
can also be played. The system can support up to eight
folders in depth, though, keep the depth of the folders to
a minimum in order to keep down the complexity and
confusion in trying to locate a particular folder during
playback. If a CD contains more than the maximum of
50 folders, five sessions, and 999 files, the player lets
you access and navigate up to the maximum, but all
items over the maximum are ignored.
.
Make sure the MP3/WMA files are recorded on a
CD-R disc.
.
Do not mix standard audio and MP3/WMA files on
one disc.
Root Directory
.
Make sure each MP3/WMA file has a .m3u or
.wma extension, other file extensions might
not work.
.
Files can be recorded with a variety of fixed or
variable bit rates. Song title, artist name, and
album are available for display by the radio when
recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.
The root directory is treated as a folder. If the root
directory has compressed audio files, the directory is
displayed as ROOT. All files contained directly under
the root directory are accessed prior to any other
directory.
.
Make sure to finalize the disc when burning an
MP3/WMA disc, using multiple sessions. It is
usually better to burn the disc all at once.
The player is able to read and play a maximum of
50 folders, five sessions, and 999 files. Long file names
and folder names can use more disc memory space
than necessary. To conserve space on the disc,
Empty Directory or Folder
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the
file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and
no compressed files directly beneath them, the player
advances to the next folder in the file structure that
contains compressed audio files. The empty folder does
not display.
4-61
No Folder
Playing an MP3/WMA
When a CD contains only compressed files, the files are
located under the root folder. The next and previous
folder function does not function on a CD that was
recorded without folders or playlists. When displaying
the name of the folder the radio displays ROOT.
With the ignition in the ON/RUN position, insert a CD
partway into the slot, label side up. The player pulls the
disc in. The CD should begin playing. As each new
track starts to play, the track number, and the song
name will appear on the display. If the ignition or radio
is turned off with a CD in the player, it will stay in the
player. When a CD is in the player and the ignition is
turned on, the radio must be turned on before the CD
will start playback. When the ignition and radio are
turned on, the CD will start playing where it stopped, if it
was the last selected audio source.
When a CD contains only compressed audio files, but
no folders, all files are located under the root folder.
When the radio displays the name of the folder, the
radio displays ROOT.
Order of Play
The player play will begin from the first track under the
root directory. When all tracks from the root directory
have been played, play will continue from files
according to their numerical listing. After playing the last
track from the last folder, the player will begin playing
again at the first track of the first folder or root directory.
File System and Naming
The song name in the ID3 tag is displayed. If the song
name is not present in the ID3 tag, then the radio
displays the file name without the extension (such as
MP3/WMA) instead.
Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages
are shortened. Parts of words on the last page of text
and the extension of the filename does not display.
4-62
The CD player can play the smaller 8 cm (3 in) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the smaller
CDs are loaded in the same manner.
Sound quality may be reduced due to CD-R quality, the
method of recording, the quality of the music that has
been recorded, and the way the CD-R has been
handled.
DIR (Directory): Press to repeat the tracks in the
current directory. DIR displays.
Press DIR again to repeat the tracks in all of the
directories. ALL displays.
Press DIR again to turn off repeat play.
u
SEEK t (Next/Previous Folder) (in MP3/WMA
Mode): Press to change the folder. If CD-R does not
have any folders, “ROOT” flashes on the display for a
short time.
[ TUNE (Next Track): Press the up TUNE arrow to go
to the next track. The track number displays. The player
continues moving forward through the CD each time
TUNE is pressed.
r TUNE (Previous Track): Press the down TUNE
arrow to go to the start of the current track. The track
number displays. The player continues moving
backward through the CD each time TUNE is pressed.
INFO/DISP (Information/Display): Press to display
additional text information related to the current MP3/
WMA song. A choice of additional information such as:
Song Title, Album Title, and Artist. Bit rate might also
display.
When information is not available, No Info displays.
Press this button for longer than two seconds to change
display mode.
SCROLL (MP3/WMA Mode Only): Press the SOUND
button for longer than two seconds. The song title or
other available information of a song scrolls on/off. The
offset is scroll on. The scroll mode can be changed only
when the SOUND button is pressed for longer than
two seconds.
XM Radio Messages
UPDATING: The encryption code in the receiver is
being updated, and no action is required. This process
should take no longer than 30 seconds.
NO SIGNAL: The system is functioning correctly, but
the vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM™
signal. When the vehicle is moved into an open area,
the signal should return.
LOADING: The audio system is acquiring and
processing audio and text data. No action is needed.
This message should disappear shortly.
OFF AIR: This channel is not currently in service. Tune
in to another channel.
CH UNAVAILABLE: This previously assigned channel
is no longer assigned. Tune to another station. If this
station was one of the presets, choose another station
for that preset button.
RADIO ID: If tuned to channel 0, this message
alternates with the XM™ Radio 8 digit radio ID label.
This label is needed to activate the service.
CHECK XM TUNER: If this message does not clear
within a short period of time, the receiver could have a
fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
4-63
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
+ VOLUME − : Press the toggle bar located below the
+ VOLUME − to adjust the volume. Press the left side of
the toggle bar, below the + (plus) sign to increase the
volume. Press the right side of the toggle bar, below the
− (minus) sign to decrease the volume.
MODE: Press and release this button multiple times to
cycle through the audio playback options that are
available on the vehicle. Options may include FM, AM,
XM, CD, and AUX.
SEEK: Press and release to go to the next preset
station.
Front View of the Steering Side View of the Volume
Wheel Controls
Control
If the vehicle has this feature, some audio controls can
be adjusted at the steering wheel.
PWR (Power): Press and release to turn the system on
and off.
When the system is on, press and release for a short
time to mute the system. Press and release again to
turn the sound back on.
4-64
Press and hold for a long time to go to the next AM, FM,
or XM station. The radio seeks stations only with a
strong signal that are in the selected band.
When playing a CD, press and release to go to the next
track. Press and hold to fast forward through the tracks.
Radio Reception
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
Frequency interference and static can occur during
normal radio reception if items such as cell phone
chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and
external electronic devices are plugged into the
accessory power outlet. If there is interference or static,
unplug the item from the accessory power outlet.
XM Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio reception
from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous United States,
and in Canada. Just as with FM, tall buildings or hills
can interfere with satellite radio signals, causing the
sound to fade in and out. In addition, traveling or
standing under heavy foliage, bridges, garages,
or tunnels may cause loss of the XM signal for a period
of time.
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause station
frequencies to interfere with each other. For better radio
reception, most AM radio stations boost the power
levels during the day, and then reduce these levels
during the night. Static can also occur when things like
storms and power lines interfere with radio reception.
When this happens, try reducing the treble on the radio.
FM Stereo
FM signals only reach about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).
Although the radio has a built-in electronic circuit that
automatically works to reduce interference, some static
can occur, especially around tall buildings or hills,
causing the sound to fade in and out.
Cellular Phone Usage
Cellular phone usage may cause interference with the
vehicle's radio. This interference may occur when
making or receiving phone calls, charging the phone's
battery, or simply having the phone on. This
interference causes an increased level of static while
listening to the radio. If static is received while listening
to the radio, unplug the cellular phone and turn it off.
Fixed Mast Antenna (Hatchback)
Vehicles without OnStar® have a fixed mast antenna
that can withstand most car washes without being
damaged. If the mast should ever become slightly bent,
straighten it out by hand. If the mast is badly bent,
replace it.
Check occasionally to make sure the mast is still
tightened to the antenna base located on the roof of the
vehicle. If tightening is required, tighten by hand.
4-65
Backglass Antenna (Sedan)
®
Vehicles without OnStar have the AM-FM antenna
integrated with the rear window defogger, located in the
rear window. Make sure that the inside surface of the
rear window is not scratched and that the lines on the
glass are not damaged. If the inside surface is
damaged, it could interfere with radio reception. Also,
for proper radio reception, the antenna connector at the
top-center of the rear window needs to be properly
attached to the post on the glass.
Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to clear
the inside rear window can damage the rear window
antenna and/or the rear window defogger. Repairs
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do
not clear the inside rear window with sharp objects.
Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting with
metallic film. The metallic film in some tinting
materials will interfere with or distort the incoming
radio reception. Any damage caused to your
backglass antenna due to metallic tinting materials
will not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Because this antenna is built into the rear window, there
is a reduced risk of damage caused by car washes and
vandals.
4-66
If static is heard on the radio, when the rear window
defogger is turned on, it could mean that a defogger
grid line has been damaged. If this is true, the grid line
must be repaired.
If adding a cellular telephone to the vehicle, and the
antenna needs to be attached to the glass, make sure
that the grid lines for the AM-FM antenna are not
damaged. There is enough space between the grid
lines to attach a cellular telephone antenna without
interfering with radio reception.
Multi-Band Antenna
Vehicles with OnStar® have a multi-band antenna that is
located on the roof of the vehicle. The antenna is used
for the AM/FM radio, OnStar® and the XM™ Satellite
Radio Service System. Keep the antenna clear of
obstructions for clear reception. If the vehicle has a
sunroof, the performance of the AM/FM radio, OnStar ®,
and the XM system may be affected if the sunroof
is open.
Section 5
Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving, the Road, and the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . .
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Antilock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Braking in Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving at Night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2
5-2
5-2
5-3
5-3
5-4
5-5
5-5
5-7
5-7
5-8
5-9
5-9
Before Leaving on a Long Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice,
or Snow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recreational Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-10
5-10
5-11
5-12
5-14
5-14
5-15
5-21
5-21
5-21
5-23
5-1
Your Driving, the Road, and the
Vehicle
Defensive Driving
Defensive driving means “always expect the
unexpected.” The first step in driving defensively is to
wear your safety belt — See Safety Belts: They Are for
Everyone on page 2‑14.
{ WARNING:
Assume that other road users (pedestrians,
bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they
might do and be ready. In addition:
.
Allow enough following distance between you
and the driver in front of you.
.
Focus on the task of driving.
Driver distraction can cause collisions resulting in
injury or possible death. These simple defensive
driving techniques could save your life.
5-2
Drunk Driving
{ WARNING:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous. Your
reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and judgment
can be affected by even a small amount of
alcohol. You can have a serious — or even
fatal — collision if you drive after drinking. Do not
drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been
drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you are with a
group, designate a driver who will not drink.
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a global tragedy.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
vehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision, and
attentiveness.
Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
17,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with about
250,000 people injured.
For persons under 21, it is against the law in every U.S.
state to drink alcohol. There are good medical,
psychological, and developmental reasons for
these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
then drive.
Medical research shows that alcohol in a person's
system can make crash injuries worse, especially
injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means
that when anyone who has been drinking — driver or
passenger — is in a crash, that person's chance of
being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the
person had not been drinking.
Control of a Vehicle
The following three systems help to control the vehicle
while driving — brakes, steering, and accelerator. At
times, as when driving on snow or ice, it is easy to ask
more of those control systems than the tires and road
can provide. Meaning, you can lose control of the
vehicle.
Braking
See Brake System Warning Light on page 4‑28.
Braking action involves perception time and reaction
time. Deciding to push the brake pedal is perception
time. Actually doing it is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about three‐fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs, and frustration. But even in three‐fourths of a
second, a vehicle moving at 100 km/h (60 mph) travels
20 m (66 feet). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between the
vehicle and others is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement or
gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is wet, dry,
or icy; tire tread; the condition of the brakes; the weight
of the vehicle; and the amount of brake force applied.
Adding non‐dealer/non‐retailer accessories can affect
vehicle performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 6‑4.
5-3
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in
spurts, heavy acceleration followed by heavy braking,
rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is a mistake.
The brakes might not have time to cool between hard
stops. The brakes will wear out much faster with a lot of
heavy braking. Keeping pace with the traffic and
allowing realistic following distances eliminates a lot of
unnecessary braking. That means better braking and
longer brake life.
If the engine ever stops while the vehicle is being
driven, brake normally but do not pump the brakes.
If the brakes are pumped, the pedal could get harder to
push down. If the engine stops, there will still be some
power brake assist but it will be used when the brake is
applied. Once the power assist is used up, it can take
longer to stop and the brake pedal will be harder
to push.
Adding non‐dealer/non‐retailer accessories can affect
vehicle performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 6‑4.
If the vehicle has ABS,
this warning light comes
on briefly when the
vehicle is started.
The warning light is on the instrument panel cluster.
See Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light on
page 4‑29.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that the wheels are slowing down.
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the
computer will separately work the brakes at each wheel.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
ABS can change the brake pressure to each wheel, as
required, faster than any driver could. This can help the
driver steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
The vehicle might have the Antilock Brake System
(ABS), an advanced electronic braking system that
helps prevent a braking skid.
As the brakes are applied, the computer keeps
receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking
pressure accordingly.
5-4
Remember: ABS does not change the time needed to
get a foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in
front of you, there will not be enough time to apply the
brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always
leave enough room up ahead to stop, even with ABS.
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let antilock work. A slight brake pedal
pulsation might be felt or some noise might be heard,
but this is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
At some time, nearly every driver gets into a situation
that requires hard braking.
If the vehicle has ABS, it allows the driver to steer and
brake at the same time. However, if the vehicle does
not have ABS, the first reaction — to hit the brake pedal
hard and hold it down — might be the wrong thing to do.
The wheels can stop rolling. Once they do, the vehicle
cannot respond to the driver's steering. Momentum will
carry it in whatever direction it was headed when the
wheels stopped rolling. That could be off the road, into
the very thing the driver was trying to avoid, or into
traffic.
If the vehicle does not have ABS, use a “squeeze”
braking technique. This gives maximum braking while
maintaining steering control. Do this by pushing on the
brake pedal with steadily increasing pressure.
In an emergency, you will probably want to squeeze the
brakes hard without locking the wheels. If you hear or
feel the wheels sliding, ease off the brake pedal. This
helps retain steering control. With ABS, it is different.
See Antilock Brake System (ABS) on page 5‑4.
In many emergencies, steering can help more than
even the very best braking.
Steering
Power Steering
If power steering assist is lost because the engine stops
or the system is not functioning, the vehicle can be
steered but it will take more effort.
Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
Traction in a curve depends on the condition of the tires
and the road surface, the angle at which the curve is
banked, and vehicle speed. While in a curve, speed is
the one factor that can be controlled.
5-5
If there is a need to reduce speed, do it before entering
the curve, while the front wheels are straight.
Try to adjust the speed so you can drive through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until out of the curve, and then accelerate
gently into the straightaway.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and
find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. These
problems can be avoided by braking — if you can stop
in time. But sometimes you cannot stop in time because
there is no room. That is the time for evasive
action — steering around the problem.
The vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply the brakes — but, unless the vehicle
has antilock brakes, not enough to lock the wheels. See
Braking on page 5‑3. It is better to remove as much
speed as possible from a collision. Then steer around
the problem, to the left or right depending on the space
available.
5-6
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If holding the steering wheel at the
recommended 9 and 3 o'clock positions, it can be
turned a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing
either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and
just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have
avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
The vehicle's right wheels can drop off the edge of a
road onto the shoulder while driving.
Passing another vehicle on a two-lane road can be
dangerous. To reduce the risk of danger while passing:
.
Look down the road, to the sides, and to
crossroads for situations that might affect a
successful pass. If in doubt, wait.
.
Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and
lines that could indicate a turn or an intersection.
Never cross a solid or double‐solid line on your
side of the lane.
.
Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass. Doing so can reduce your visibility.
.
Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle.
.
When you are being passed, ease to the right.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer
so that the vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement.
Turn the steering wheel 8 to 13 cm (3 to 5 inches),
about one-eighth turn, until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn the steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
5-7
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough
friction where the tires meet the road to do what the
driver has asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of less
danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking
reasonable care suited to existing conditions, and by
not overdriving those conditions. But skids are always
possible.
The three types of skids correspond to the vehicle's
three control systems. In the braking skid, the wheels
are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too
much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip
and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid,
too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
If the vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
the vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for a
second skid if it occurs.
5-8
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, slow
down and adjust your driving to these conditions. It is
important to slow down on slippery surfaces because
stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control
more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration,
or braking, including reducing vehicle speed by shifting
to a lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the
tires to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery
until the vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow on
the road to make a mirrored surface — and slow down
when you have any doubt.
If the vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS),
remember: It helps avoid only the braking skid. If the
vehicle does not have ABS, then in a braking skid,
where the wheels are no longer rolling, release enough
pressure on the brakes to get the wheels rolling again.
This restores steering control. Push the brake pedal
down steadily when you have to stop suddenly. As long
as the wheels are rolling, you will have steering control.
Driving at Night
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving
because some drivers are likely to be impaired — by
alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by
fatigue.
Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction and
affect your ability to stop and accelerate. Always drive
slower in these types of driving conditions and avoid
driving through large puddles and deep‐standing or
flowing water.
Night driving tips include:
.
Drive defensively.
.
Do not drink and drive.
.
Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside
rearview mirror.
.
Slow down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles because headlamps can only light
up so much road ahead.
.
Watch for animals.
.
When tired, pull off the road.
.
Do not wear sunglasses.
.
Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps.
.
Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out.
.
Keep your eyes moving, especially during turns or
curves.
{ WARNING:
Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might not
work as well in a quick stop and could cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of the
vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water or a
car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake pedal
until the brakes work normally.
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
Driving through flowing water could cause your
vehicle to be carried away. If this happens, you
and other vehicle occupants could drown. Do not
ignore police warnings and be very cautious about
trying to drive through flowing water.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But, as we get older, these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver might need at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
5-9
Hydroplaning
Things to check on your own include:
.
Windshield Washer Fluid: Reservoir full? Windows
clean — inside and outside?
.
Wiper Blades: In good shape?
.
Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All levels checked?
.
There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The
best advice is to slow down when the road is wet.
Lamps: Do they all work and are lenses clean?
.
Other Rainy Weather Tips
Tires: Are treads good? Are tires inflated to
recommended pressure?
.
Weather and Maps: Safe to travel? Have
up-to-date maps?
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up under
your vehicle's tires so they actually ride on the water.
This can happen if the road is wet enough and you are
going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning, it
has little or no contact with the road.
Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving tips
include:
Highway Hypnosis
.
Allow extra following distance.
.
Pass with caution.
.
Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.
Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings
while driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find a safe
place to park your vehicle and rest.
.
Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled.
Other driving tips include:
.
Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires
on page 6‑51.
.
Turn off cruise control.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
To prepare your vehicle for a long trip, consider having
it serviced by your dealer/retailer before departing.
5-10
.
Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
.
Keep interior temperature cool.
.
Keep your eyes moving — scan the road ahead
and to the sides.
.
Check the rearview mirror and vehicle instruments
often.
Hill and Mountain Roads
{ WARNING:
Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different
than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for driving in
these conditions include:
.
Keep the vehicle serviced and in good shape.
.
Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling
system, and transmission.
.
Going down steep or long hills, shift to a
lower gear.
{ WARNING:
If you do not shift down, the brakes could get so
hot that they would not work well. You would then
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Shift down to let the engine
assist the brakes on a steep downhill slope.
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. The brakes will have to
do all the work of slowing down and they could
get so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none going
down a hill. You could crash. Always have the
engine running and the vehicle in gear when
going downhill.
.
Stay in your own lane. Do not swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that
let you stay in your own lane.
.
Top of hills: Be alert — something could be in your
lane (stalled car, accident).
.
Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocks
area, winding roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take appropriate action.
5-11
Winter Driving
Driving on Snow or Ice
Drive carefully when there is snow or ice between the
tires and the road, creating less traction or grip. Wet ice
can occur at about 0°C (32°F) when freezing rain
begins to fall, resulting in even less traction. Avoid
driving on wet ice or in freezing rain until roads can be
treated with salt or sand.
Drive with caution, whatever the condition. Accelerate
gently so traction is not lost. Accelerating too quickly
causes the wheels to spin and makes the surface under
the tires slick, so there is even less traction.
Try not to break the fragile traction. If you accelerate too
fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface
under the tires even more.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) on page 5‑4
improves vehicle stability during hard stops on slippery
roads, but whether the vehicle has ABS or not, apply
the brakes sooner than when on dry pavement. Without
ABS, if the vehicle begins to slide, let up on the brake
pedal a little and apply steady pedal pressure to get the
most traction. On vehicles without ABS, braking so hard
that the wheels stop rolling can cause the vehicle to
slide — brake so the wheels always keep rolling so you
can still steer.
5-12
Allow greater following distance on any slippery road
and watch for slippery spots. Icy patches can occur on
otherwise clear roads in shaded areas. The surface of a
curve or an overpass can remain icy when the
surrounding roads are clear. Avoid sudden steering
maneuvers and braking while on ice.
Turn off cruise control, if equipped, on slippery surfaces.
Blizzard Conditions
Being stuck in snow can be in a serious situation. Stay
with the vehicle unless there is help nearby. If possible,
use the Roadside Assistance Program on page 8‑7.
To get help and keep everyone in the vehicle safe:
.
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers on
page 4‑3.
.
Tie a red cloth to an outside mirror.
{ WARNING:
WARNING: (Continued)
Snow can trap engine exhaust under the vehicle.
This may cause exhaust gases to get inside.
Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
For more information about carbon monoxide, see
Engine Exhaust on page 3‑32.
If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:
.
Clear away snow from around the base of
your vehicle, especially any that is blocking
the exhaust pipe.
.
Check again from time to time to be sure
snow does not collect there.
.
Open a window about 5 cm (two inches) on
the side of the vehicle that is away from the
wind to bring in fresh air.
.
Fully open the air outlets on or under the
instrument panel.
.
Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting
that circulates the air inside the vehicle and
set the fan speed to the highest setting. See
Climate Control System in the Index.
(Continued)
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle.
This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas
to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill you.
You cannot see it or smell it, so you might not
know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from
around the base of your vehicle, especially any
that is blocking the exhaust.
Run the engine for short periods only as needed to
keep warm, but be careful.
To save fuel, run the engine for only short periods as
needed to warm the vehicle and then shut the engine
off and close the window most of the way to save heat.
Repeat this until help arrives but only when you feel
really uncomfortable from the cold. Moving about to
keep warm also helps.
If it takes some time for help to arrive, now and then
when you run the engine, push the accelerator pedal
slightly so the engine runs faster than the idle speed.
This keeps the battery charged to restart the vehicle
and to signal for help with the headlamps. Do this as
little as possible to save fuel.
5-13
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow
Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free the
vehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. See
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 5‑14.
{ WARNING:
If you let your vehicle's tires spin at high speed,
they can explode, and you or others could be
injured. The vehicle can overheat, causing an
engine compartment fire or other damage. Spin
the wheels as little as possible and avoid going
above 55 km/h (35 mph) as shown on the
speedometer.
For information about using tire chains on the vehicle,
see Tire Chains on page 6‑69.
5-14
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
Turn the steering wheel left and right to clear the area
around the front wheels. Shift back and forth between
R (Reverse) and a forward gear, or with a manual
transmission, between 1 (First) or 2 (Second) and
R (Reverse), spinning the wheels as little as possible.
To prevent transmission wear, wait until the wheels stop
spinning before shifting gears. Release the accelerator
pedal while shifting, and press lightly on the accelerator
pedal when the transmission is in gear. Slowly spinning
the wheels in the forward and reverse directions causes
a rocking motion that could free the vehicle. If that does
not get the vehicle out after a few tries, it might need to
be towed out. If the vehicle does need to be towed out,
see Towing Your Vehicle on page 5‑21.
Loading the Vehicle
Tire and Loading Information Label
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle
capacity weight or maximum load amount and
includes the weight of all occupants, cargo, and
all nonfactory‐installed options. Two labels on
your vehicle show how much weight it may
properly carry, the Tire and Loading Information
label and the Certification label.
{ WARNING:
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts
on the vehicle can break, and it can change
the way the vehicle handles. These could
cause you to lose control and crash. Also,
overloading can shorten the life of the
vehicle.
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to the vehicle's center
pillar (B‐pillar). With the driver's door open, you
will find the label attached below the door lock
post (striker). The Tire and Loading Information
label shows the number of occupant seating
positions (A), and the maximum vehicle capacity
weight (B) in kilograms and pounds.
5-15
The Tire and Loading Information label also
shows the tire size of the original equipment
tires (C) and the recommended cold tire inflation
pressures (D). For more information on tires and
inflation see Tires on page 6‑51 and Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 6‑58.
There is also important loading information on the
Certification label. See “Certification Label” later in
this section.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle's placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
5-16
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 ‐ 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Your vehicle is neither designed nor intended to
tow a trailer.
Example 1
Item
A
B
C
Description
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 1 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight @ 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 2 =
Available Occupant
and Cargo Weight =
Example 2
Total
Item
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
A
300 lbs (136 kg)
B
700 lbs (317 kg)
C
Description
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 2 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight @ 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Total
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
750 lbs (340 kg)
250 lbs (113 kg)
5-17
Refer to your vehicle's tire and loading information
label for specific information about your vehicle's
capacity weight and seating positions. The
combined weight of the driver, passenger, and
cargo should never exceed your vehicle's capacity
weight.
Example 3
Item
A
B
C
5-18
Description
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 3 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight @ 200 lbs
(91 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Total
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
0 lbs (0 kg)
Certification Label
Label Example ‐ Canada
Label Example ‐ United States
A vehicle specific Certification label is attached to
the center pillar (B‐pillar), below the driver's door
latch. This label tells you the gross weight
capacity of your vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the
weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and
cargo. Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle,
or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for
either the front or rear axle.
5-19
If there is a heavy load, it should be spread out.
See “Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit”
earlier in this section.
{ WARNING:
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts
on the vehicle can break, and it can change
the way the vehicle handles. These could
cause you to lose control and crash. Also,
overloading can shorten the life of the
vehicle.
Notice : Overloading the vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. Do not overload the vehicle.
If you put things inside your vehicle — like
suitcases, tools, packages, or anything
else — they will go as fast as the vehicle goes.
If you have to stop or turn quickly, or if there is a
crash, they will keep going.
5-20
{ WARNING:
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn,
or in a crash.
.
Put things in the cargo area of your
vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly.
.
Never stack heavier things, like
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that some
of them are above the tops of the seats.
.
Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
in your vehicle.
.
When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
.
Do not leave a seat folded down unless
you need to.
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
To avoid damage, the disabled vehicle should be towed
with all four wheels off the ground. Consult your dealer/
retailer or a professional towing service if the disabled
vehicle must be towed. See Roadside Assistance
Program on page 8‑7.
Here are some important things to consider before
recreational vehicle towing:
.
What is the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure to read the tow vehicle manufacturer's
recommendations.
.
What is the distance that will be travelled? Some
vehicles have restrictions on how far and how long
they can tow.
.
Is the proper towing equipment going to be used?
See your dealer/retailer or trailering professional
for additional advice and equipment
recommendations.
.
Is the vehicle ready to be towed? Just as preparing
the vehicle for a long trip, make sure the vehicle is
prepared to be towed. See Before Leaving on a
Long Trip on page 5‑10.
To tow the vehicle behind another vehicle for
recreational purposes, such as behind a motorhome,
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing the vehicle
behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as dinghy towing and dolly towing.
Dinghy towing is towing the vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground. Dolly towing is towing the vehicle with
two wheels on the ground and two wheels up on a
device known as a dolly.
5-21
Dinghy Towing
Dolly Towing From the Front
Notice: If the vehicle is towed with all four wheels
on the ground, the drivetrain components could be
damaged. The repairs would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. Do not tow the vehicle with all four
wheels on the ground.
The vehicle can be towed from the front using a dolly.
To tow the vehicle using a dolly, follow these steps:
The vehicle was not designed to be towed with all four
wheels on the ground. If the vehicle must be towed, a
dolly should be used. See “Dolly Towing” that follows for
more information.
5-22
1. Attach the dolly to the tow vehicle following the
dolly manufacturer's instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the dolly.
3. Put an automatic transmission in P (Park) or a
manual transmission in N (Neutral).
4. Set the parking brake and remove the key.
Dolly Towing From the Rear
5. For an automatic transmission, insert the key into
the shift‐lock release slot and shift to N (Neutral).
See Shifting Out of Park on page 3‑30.
6. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
position with a clamping device designed for
towing.
7. Release the parking brake.
Notice: Towing the vehicle from the rear with
the front wheels on the ground could cause
transmission damage. Do not tow the vehicle from
the rear with the front wheels on the ground.
Towing a Trailer
The vehicle is neither designed nor intended to tow a
trailer.
5-23
2 NOTES
5-24
Section 6
Service and Appearance Care
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Accessories and Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
California Proposition 65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
California Perchlorate Materials
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Doing Your Own Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Adding Equipment to the Outside of the
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Gasoline Octane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
California Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Filling a Portable Fuel Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Checking Things Under the Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Engine Compartment Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and Parking
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL)
(Hatchback) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-19
6-20
6-23
6-23
6-24
6-25
6-30
6-32
6-33
6-34
6-37
6-38
6-43
6-43
6-43
6-44
6-45
6-47
6-1
Section 6
Service and Appearance Care
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL)
(Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Sidemarker, Stoplamps
and Back-up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Terminology and Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inflation - Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Pressure Monitor System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Inspection and Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
When It Is Time for New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Different Size Tires and Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Uniform Tire Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2
6-47
6-48
6-49
6-49
6-50
6-51
6-52
6-55
6-58
6-59
6-60
6-62
6-64
6-64
6-66
6-66
6-68
6-68
Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing a Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools . . . . . . . . .
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interior Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fabric/Carpet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic
Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Care of Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Weatherstrips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Washing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield and Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-69
6-69
6-70
6-71
6-73
6-78
6-78
6-79
6-79
6-80
6-81
6-81
6-82
6-82
6-82
6-82
6-83
6-83
Section 6
Service and Appearance Care
Aluminum Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sheet Metal Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Finish Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Underbody Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chemical Paint Spotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service Parts Identification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-84
6-84
6-84
6-85
6-85
6-85
6-86
6-86
6-86
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add-On Electrical Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlamp Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield Wiper Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Windows and Other Power Options . . . . .
Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument Panel Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Compartment Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Capacities and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-86
6-86
6-87
6-87
6-87
6-87
6-88
6-89
6-93
6-3
Service
Accessories and Modifications
For service and parts needs, visit your dealer/retailer.
You will receive genuine GM parts and GM-trained and
supported service people.
When non‐dealer/non‐retailer accessories are added to
the vehicle, they can affect vehicle performance and
safety, including such things as airbags, braking,
stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,
aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systems like
antilock brakes, traction control, and stability control.
Some of these accessories could even cause
malfunction or damage not covered by the vehicle
warranty.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
Damage to vehicle components resulting from the
installation or use of non‐GM certified parts, including
control module modifications, is not covered under the
terms of the vehicle warranty and may affect remaining
warranty coverage for affected parts.
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on the vehicle. Your GM
dealer/retailer can accessorize the vehicle using
genuine GM Accessories. When you go to your GM
dealer/retailer and ask for GM Accessories, you
will know that GM-trained and supported service
technicians will perform the work using genuine GM
Accessories.
Also, see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 2‑71.
6-4
California Proposition 65 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems, many
fluids, and some component wear by-products contain
and/or emit these chemicals.
California Perchlorate Materials
Requirements
Certain types of automotive applications, such as
airbag initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium
batteries contained in remote keyless transmitters,
may contain perchlorate materials. Special handling
may be necessary. For additional information, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Doing Your Own Service Work
{ WARNING:
You can be injured and the vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle
without knowing enough about it.
.
Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts,
and tools before attempting any vehicle
maintenance task.
.
Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and
other fasteners. English and metric fasteners
can be easily confused. If the wrong fasteners
are used, parts can later break or fall off. You
could be hurt.
If doing some of your own service work, use the proper
service manual. It tells you much more about how to
service the vehicle than this manual can. To order the
proper service manual, see Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 8‑17.
This vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting
to do your own service work, see Servicing Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 2‑70.
6-5
Keep a record with all parts receipts and list the
mileage and the date of any service work performed.
See Maintenance Record on page 7‑15.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
the Vehicle
Things added to the outside of the vehicle can affect
the airflow around it. This can cause wind noise and
can affect fuel economy and windshield washer
performance. Check with your dealer/retailer before
adding equipment to the outside of the vehicle.
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of
the proper maintenance of this vehicle. To help keep
the engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle
performance, we recommend the use of gasoline
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
Look for the TOP TIER label on the fuel pump to
ensure gasoline meets enhanced detergency standards
developed by auto companies. A list of marketers
providing TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline can be found
at www.toptiergas.com.
6-6
Gasoline Octane
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating is less than
87, an audible knocking noise, commonly referred to
as spark knock, might be heard when driving. If this
occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher
as soon as possible. If heavy knocking is heard when
using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher, the engine
needs service.
Gasoline Specifications
Additives
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM
specification D 4814 in the United States or
CAN/CGSB‐3.5 or 3.511 in Canada. Some gasolines
contain an octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
We recommend against the use of gasolines containing
MMT. See Additives on page 6‑7 for additional
information.
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that help prevent
engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing
the emission control system to work properly. In most
cases, nothing should have to be added to the fuel.
However, some gasolines contain only the minimum
amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency regulations. To help keep fuel
injectors and intake valves clean, or if the vehicle
experiences problems due to dirty injectors or valves,
look for gasoline that is advertised as TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline.
California Fuel
If the vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that meet
California specifications. See the underhood emission
control label. If this fuel is not available in states
adopting California emissions standards, the vehicle
will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system performance
might be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp could
turn on and the vehicle might fail a smog‐check test.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 4‑31. If this
occurs, return to your authorized dealer/retailer for
diagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is caused
by the type of fuel used, repairs might not be covered
by the vehicle warranty.
For customers who do not use TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline regularly, one bottle of GM Fuel System
Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel tank at every engine
oil change, can help clean deposits from fuel injectors
and intake valves. GM Fuel System Treatment PLUS is
the only gasoline additive recommended by General
Motors.
Also, your dealer/retailer has additives that will help
correct and prevent most deposit‐related problems.
6-7
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be available
in your area. We recommend that you use these
gasolines, if they comply with the specifications
described earlier. However, E85 (85% ethanol) and
other fuels containing more than 10% ethanol must not
be used in vehicles that were not designed for those
fuels.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
Notice: This vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.
That damage would not be covered under the
vehicle warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club,
or contact a major oil company that does business in
the country where you will be driving.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions can contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. We recommend against
the use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can
reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance of
the emission control system could be affected. The
malfunction indicator lamp might turn on. If this occurs,
return to your dealer/retailer for service.
6-8
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel might be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Filling the Tank
{ WARNING:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to you
and others, read and follow all the instructions
on the fuel pump island. Turn off the engine
when refueling. Do not smoke near fuel or when
refueling the vehicle. Do not use cellular phones.
(Continued)
WARNING: (Continued)
Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials away
from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling the vehicle. This is against the law
in some places. Do not re-enter the vehicle while
pumping fuel. Keep children away from the fuel
pump; never let children pump fuel.
To open the fuel filler
door, pull up on the
release lever with this
symbol on it. It is located
on the floor on the
outboard side of the
driver seat.
Hatchback shown. Sedan similar
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel
door on the passenger side of the vehicle.
6-9
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.
The fuel cap has a spring in it; if the cap is released too
soon, it will spring back to the right.
{ WARNING:
Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap
too quickly. If you spill fuel and then something
ignites it, you could be badly burned. This spray
can happen if the tank is nearly full, and is more
likely in hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowly and
wait for any hiss noise to stop. Then unscrew the
cap all the way.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel from
painted surfaces as soon as possible. See Washing
Your Vehicle on page 6‑82.
6-10
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until
it clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. This would allow
fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 4‑31.
{ WARNING:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the station
attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Notice: If a new fuel cap is needed, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer/retailer can get one for
you. The wrong type might not fit properly. This can
cause the malfunction indicator lamp to light and
can damage the fuel tank and emissions system.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 4‑31.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
{ WARNING:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
the vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the
container can ignite the fuel vapor. You can be
badly burned and the vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoid injury to you and others:
.
Dispense fuel only into approved containers.
.
Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle's trunk, pickup bed, or
on any surface other than the ground.
.
Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside
of the fill opening before operating the nozzle.
Contact should be maintained until the filling is
complete.
.
Do not smoke while pumping fuel.
.
Do not use a cellular phone while
pumping fuel.
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{ WARNING:
An electric fan under the hood can start up and
injure you even when the engine is not running.
Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
{ WARNING:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and
start a fire. These include liquids like fuel, oil,
coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and other
fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others could
be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill things
that will burn onto a hot engine.
6-11
Hood Release
To open the hood:
1. Pull the hood release
handle inside the
vehicle. It is located on
the lower left side of
the instrument panel.
2. At the front of the vehicle, lift up on the secondary
hood release lever, located under the front center
of the hood.
6-12
To close the hood:
3. Lift the hood and release the hood prop from its
retainer, located on the underside of the hood.
Securely place the hood prop into the slot on the
inner fender.
1. Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps
are on properly. Then, lift the hood to relieve
pressure on the hood prop. Remove the hood prop
from the slot in the inner fender and return the prop
to its retainer. The prop rod must click into place
when returning it to the retainer to prevent hood
damage.
2. Lower the hood 30 cm (12 inches) above the
vehicle and release it so it fully latches. Check to
make sure the hood is closed and repeat the
process if necessary.
6-13
Engine Compartment Overview
Automatic Transmission shown, Manual Transmission similar
6-14
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 6‑19.
B. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 6‑15.
C. Brake/Clutch Fluid Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
under Brakes on page 6‑34 and Hydraulic Clutch
on page 6‑23.
Engine Oil
If the engine oil pressure
light comes on, check the
engine oil level right away.
D. Engine Coolant Surge Tank. See Cooling System
on page 6‑24.
E. Engine Compartment Fuse Block on page 6‑89.
F. Battery on page 6‑37.
G. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid on
page 6‑33.
The oil pressure light is on the instrument panel cluster.
See Oil Pressure Light on page 4‑33. Check the
engine oil level regularly; this is an added reminder.
H. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 6‑15.
I. Automatic Transmission Dipstick. See Automatic
Transmission Fluid on page 6‑20.
J. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power
Steering Fluid on page 6‑32.
6-15
Checking Engine Oil
When to Add Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check the engine oil level at each
fuel fill. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must
be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See
Engine Compartment Overview on page 6‑14 for the
location of the engine oil dipstick.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If this is not done, the
oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
2. Pull the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or
cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down and check the level.
If the oil is below the MIN (minimum) mark on
the dipstick, add at least one liter/quart of the
recommended oil. This section explains what kind
of oil to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity, see
Capacities and Specifications on page 6‑93.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine has
so much oil that the oil level gets above the upper
mark that shows the proper operating range, the
engine could be damaged.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6‑14 for
the location of the engine oil fill cap.
Add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper
operating range. Push the dipstick all the way back in
when through.
6-16
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Look for three things:
.
GM6094M
Use only an oil that meets GM Standard
GM6094M.
.
SAE 5W-30
SAE 5W-30 is best for the vehicle. These numbers
on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness.
Do not use other viscosity oils such as
SAE 20W-50.
.
American Petroleum Institute (API) starburst
symbol
Oils meeting these
requirements should have
the starburst symbol on
the container. This symbol
indicates that the oil has
been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by the
vehicle warranty.
6-17
Cold Temperature Operation
Engine Oil Life System
If in an area of extreme cold, where the temperature
falls below −29°C (−20°F), use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 engine oil. Both provide
easier cold starting for the engine at extremely low
temperatures. Always use an oil that meets the required
specification, GM6094M. See “What Kind of Engine Oil
to Use” for more information.
When to Change Engine Oil
Engine Oil Additives / Engine Oil
Flushes
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended
oils with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard
GM6094M are all that is needed for good performance
and engine protection.
Engine oil system flushes are not recommended and
could cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle
warranty.
This vehicle has the Engine Oil Life System, a computer
system that indicates when to change the engine oil
and filter. This is based on engine revolutions and
engine temperature, and not on mileage. Based on
driving conditions, the mileage at which an oil change is
indicated can vary considerably. For the oil life system
to work properly, the system must be reset every time
the oil is changed.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it indicates that an oil change is necessary.
A change engine oil light displays. Change the oil as
soon as possible within the next 1 000 km (600 miles).
It is possible that, if driving under the best conditions,
the oil life system might not indicate that an oil change
is necessary for over a year. However, the engine oil
and filter must be changed at least once a year and at
this time the system must be reset. Your dealer/retailer
has trained service people who will perform this work
using genuine parts and reset the system. It is also
important to check the oil regularly and keep it at the
proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, the oil must
be changed at 5 000 km (3,000 miles) since the last
oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed.
6-18
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change
your engine oil and filter based on vehicle use.
Whenever the oil is changed, reset the system so it
can calculate when the next oil change is required. If a
situation occurs where the oil is changed prior to a
change engine oil light being turned on, reset the
system.
After changing the engine oil, the system must be reset:
1. With the engine off, turn the ignition key to
ON/RUN.
2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal
slowly three times within five seconds.
3. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF, then start the vehicle.
If the change engine oil light comes back on when the
vehicle is started, the engine oil life system has not
reset. Repeat the reset procedure.
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good hand
cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags
containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer's
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it in
the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Recycle it by taking it to a
place that collects used oil.
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
The engine air cleaner/filter is located in the engine
compartment on the passenger side of the vehicle.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6‑14 for
more information on location.
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after
each 50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 7‑3 for more information. If you
are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter at
each engine oil change.
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the engine air cleaner/filter, remove the filter
from the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release
loose dust and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt,
a new filter is required.
6-19
To inspect or replace the air cleaner/filter:
{ WARNING:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off
can cause you or others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to stop
flames if the engine backfires. Use caution when
working on the engine and do not drive with the
air cleaner/filter off.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, dirt can easily
get into the engine, which could damage it. Always
have the air cleaner/filter in place when you are
driving.
1. Remove the screws and lift off the cover.
2. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
3. Put the cover back on tightly and tighten the
screws.
See Scheduled Maintenance on page 7‑3 for
replacement intervals.
6-20
Automatic Transmission Fluid
When to Check Automatic
Transmission Fluid
Check the automatic transmission fluid level at least
twice a year. Add fluid if needed. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 7‑3.
How to Check Automatic Transmission
Fluid
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal
operating temperature, which is 158°F to 176°F (70°C
to 80°C).
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at the dealer/retailer service
department.
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles
(24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50°F
(10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C), you may have
to drive longer.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage the
transmission. Too much can mean that some of the
fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts or
exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Too little fluid
could cause the transmission to overheat. Be sure
to get an accurate reading if checking the
transmission fluid.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the
transmission fluid level if you have been driving:
.
When outside temperatures are above
90°F (32°C).
.
At high speed for quite a while.
.
In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.
Checking the Fluid Level
Prepare the vehicle as follows:
1. Park the vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine
running.
2. With the parking brake applied, place the shift
lever in P (Park).
3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position the
shift lever in P (Park).
4. Let the engine run at idle for three to five minutes.
6-21
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these
steps:
1. Locate the automatic transmission dipstick
which is located toward the front of the engine
compartment, near the power steering fluid
reservoir.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6‑14
for more information on location.
2. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or
paper towel.
3. Push the dipstick back in all the way, wait
three seconds, and then pull it back out again.
How to Add Automatic Transmission
Fluid
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transmission fluid to use. See Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 7‑11.
If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper
fluid to bring the level into the area between the
two dimples in the hot range on the dipstick.
1. Pull out the dipstick.
2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid at the
dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.
It does not take much fluid, generally less than
one pint (0.5 L). Do not overfill.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission
fluid may damage the vehicle, and the damages may
not be covered by the vehicle's warranty. Always
use the automatic transmission fluid listed in
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7‑11.
4. Check both sides of the dipstick. The fluid should
be between MIN (A) and MAX (B) mark of the hot
area of the dipstick.
5. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push
the dipstick back in all the way.
6-22
3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check Automatic
Transmission Fluid” earlier in this section.
4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way.
Manual Transmission Fluid
When to Check and What to Use
It is not necessary to check the transmission fluid
level. A transmission fluid leak is the only reason for
fluid loss. If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to the
dealer/retailer service department and have it repaired
as soon as possible. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 7‑11 for the proper fluid to use.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the fluid level in the master cylinder
reservoir and for the proper fluid. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 7‑3 and Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 7‑11.
Hydraulic Clutch
There is one reservoir for both the brake and the
hydraulic clutch fluid. See Brakes on page 6‑34 for
more information.
The hydraulic clutch linkage in the vehicle is
self-adjusting. The master cylinder reservoir is filled
with hydraulic fluid.
A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem.
Have the system inspected and repaired.
6-23
How to Check and Add Fluid
Cooling System
The reservoir is located near the back of the engine
compartment on the driver side of the vehicle.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6‑14
for more information on location.
The cooling system allows the engine to maintain the
correct working temperature.
A. Electric Engine Cooling Fan
To check the fluid level, look on the side of the
reservoir. If the fluid reaches the MAX (A) mark on the
reservoir, the fluid level is correct. If the fluid does not
reach the MIN (B) mark on the reservoir, then fluid
needs to be added.
6-24
B. Coolant Surge Tank with Pressure Cap
{ WARNING:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can
start up even when the engine is not running and
can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
{ WARNING:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. If you
do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you run
the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you could be burned.
Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX‐COOL® can
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at the first maintenance
service after each 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or
24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always use DEX‐COOL® (silicate‐free) coolant in
the vehicle.
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in the vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in the vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first.
The following explains the cooling system and how
to check and add coolant when it is low. If there is
a problem with engine overheating, see Engine
Overheating on page 6‑30.
6-25
What to Use
{ WARNING:
Adding only plain water to the cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the proper
coolant mixture will. The vehicle's coolant warning
system is set for the proper coolant mixture. With
plain water or the wrong mixture, the engine could
get too hot but you would not get the overheat
warning. The engine could catch fire and you or
others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of
clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant. If using this mixture, nothing else
needs to be added. This mixture:
.
Gives freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C),
outside temperature.
.
Gives boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C),
engine temperature.
6-26
.
Protects against rust and corrosion.
.
Will not damage aluminum parts.
.
Helps keep the proper engine temperature.
Notice: If an improper coolant mixture is used, the
engine could overheat and be badly damaged. The
repair cost would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core, and
other parts.
Notice: If extra inhibitors and/or additives are used
in the vehicle's cooling system, the vehicle could be
damaged. Use only the proper mixture of the engine
coolant listed in this manual for the cooling system.
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 7‑11 for more information.
Checking Coolant
The vehicle must be on a level surface when checking
the coolant level.
Check to see if coolant is visible in the coolant surge
tank. If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is
boiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.
If coolant is visible but the coolant level is not between
the Minimum and Maximum marks, add a 50/50 mixture
of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant at
the coolant surge tank, but be sure the cooling system
is cool before this is done. See Engine Coolant on
page 6‑25 for more information.
{ WARNING:
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam and
scalding liquids to blow out and burn you badly.
Never turn the surge tank pressure cap — even a
little — when the engine and radiator are hot.
When the engine is cold, the coolant level should be
between the Maximum (A) and Minimum (B) marks
on the coolant surge tank. The level rises at engine
operation temperature and drops again when the engine
cools down.
The coolant should be between the Maximum (A) and
Minimum (B) marks, when the engine is cold. If it is not,
there could be a leak in the cooling system.
The engine coolant surge tank is located in the rear
of the engine compartment on the driver side of the
vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 6‑14 for more information on location.
6-27
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank
{ WARNING:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough.
Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fill
procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could
cause the engine to overheat and be severely
damaged.
{ WARNING:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can
start up even when the engine is not running and
can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
6-28
{ WARNING:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the surge tank
pressure cap — even a little — they can come
out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the surge tank pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and surge
tank pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn
the pressure cap.
If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add coolant as
follows:
1. Remove the coolant surge tank pressure cap
when the cooling system, including the coolant
surge tank pressure cap and upper radiator hose,
is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise about two or two and one-half
turns.
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. This will
allow any pressure still left to be vented out the
discharge hose.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly and
remove it.
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture
to the Maximum mark on the coolant surge tank.
Wait about five minutes, then check to see if the
level is below the mark. If the level is below the
Maximum mark, add additional coolant to bring the
level up to the mark.
Repeat this procedure until the level remains
constant at the Maximum mark for at least
five minutes.
6-29
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start
the engine and let it run until you can feel the
upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fan.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower than
the Maximum mark, add more of the proper
mixture to the coolant surge tank until the level
reaches the mark.
5. Replace the pressure cap. Be sure the pressure
cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
secured.
Then check to see if the engine cooling fan is running.
If the engine is overheating, the fan should be running.
If it is not, do not continue to run the engine and have
the vehicle serviced.
Notice: Engine damage from running the engine
without coolant is not covered by the warranty.
Notice: If the engine catches fire because of being
driven with no coolant, your vehicle can be badly
damaged. The costly repairs would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty.
If Steam Is Coming From The Engine
Compartment
{ WARNING:
Engine Overheating
The vehicle has an indicator to warn of the engine
overheating.
There is a coolant temperature gauge on the instrument
panel cluster. See Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge
on page 4‑30.
You may decide not to lift the hood when this warning
appears, but instead get service help right away. See
Roadside Assistance Program on page 8‑7.
If you do decide to lift the hood, make sure the vehicle
is parked on a level surface.
6-30
Steam from an overheated engine can burn you
badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam coming
from it. Just turn it off and get everyone away from
the vehicle until it cools down. Wait until there is
no sign of steam or coolant before you open
the hood.
(Continued)
WARNING: (Continued)
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You or
others could be badly burned. Stop your engine if
it overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the
engine is cool.
If No Steam Is Coming From The
Engine Compartment
If an engine overheat warning is displayed but no steam
can be seen or heard, the problem may not be too
serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot
when the vehicle:
.
Climbs a long hill on a hot day.
.
Stops after high-speed driving.
.
Idles for long periods in traffic.
If the overheat warning is displayed with no sign of
steam:
1. Turn the air conditioning off.
2. Turn the heater on to the highest temperature and
to the highest fan speed. Open the windows as
necessary.
3. If in a traffic jam, let the engine idle in N (Neutral)
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the
road, shift to P (Park) or N (Neutral) and let the
engine idle.
If the temperature overheat gauge is no longer in
the overheat zone or an overheat warning no longer
displays, the vehicle can be driven. Continue to drive
the vehicle slow for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe
vehicle distance from the car in front of you. If the
warning does not come back on, continue to drive
normally.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park the
vehicle right away.
If there is no sign of steam, idle the engine for
three minutes while parked. If the warning is still
displayed, turn off the engine until it cools down.
6-31
Power Steering Fluid
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
The power steering fluid reservoir is located toward the
front of the engine compartment on the driver's side of
the vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 6‑14 for reservoir location.
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering
fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
Turn the key off and let the engine compartment
cool down.
6-32
The level should be above the MIN mark on the
reservoir. If the level drops below the MIN mark, add
power steering fluid. Do not overfill the reservoir and
remember to replace the cap tightly when you are
finished and clean up any spilled fluid.
What to Use
Notice:
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7‑11.
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.
.
When using concentrated washer fluid,
follow the manufacturer's instructions for
adding water.
.
Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer
fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze
and damage the washer fluid tank and other
parts of the washer system. Also, water does
not clean as well as washer fluid.
.
Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters
full when it is very cold. This allows for fluid
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
.
Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in
the windshield washer. It can damage the
vehicle's windshield washer system and
paint.
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to
read the manufacturer's instructions before use. If you
will be operating your vehicle in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has
sufficient protection against freezing.
Adding Washer Fluid
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it.
Add washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 6‑14 for
reservoir location.
6-33
Brakes
Brake Fluid
The vehicle has one
reservoir for both the
brake and clutch hydraulic
systems. It is filled with
DOT 3 brake fluid.
Do not top off the brake fluid. Adding brake fluid does
not correct a leak. If fluid is added when the linings are
worn, there will be too much fluid when new brake
linings are installed. Add or remove fluid, as necessary,
only when work is done on the brake or clutch hydraulic
system.
{ WARNING:
If too much brake fluid is added, it can spill on the
engine and burn, if the engine is hot enough. You
or others could be burned, and the vehicle could
be damaged. Add brake fluid only when work is
done on the brake and/or clutch hydraulic system.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6‑14 for
the location of the reservoir.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down:
.
.
6-34
The brake fluid level goes down because of normal
brake lining wear. When new linings are installed,
the fluid level goes back up.
A fluid leak in the brake or clutch hydraulic system
can also cause a low fluid level. Have the brake or
clutch hydraulic system fixed, since a leak means
that sooner or later the brakes will not work well.
When the brake fluid falls to a low level, the brake
warning light comes on. See Brake System Warning
Light on page 4‑28.
What to Add
Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid from a sealed
container. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 7‑11.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This helps keep dirt
from entering the reservoir.
{ WARNING:
With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake or clutch
hydraulic system, the brakes or clutch might not
work well. This could cause a crash. Always use
the proper brake fluid.
Notice:
.
.
Using the wrong fluid can badly damage
brake or clutch hydraulic system parts. For
example, just a few drops of mineral-based
oil, such as engine oil, in the brake or clutch
hydraulic system can damage brake or
clutch hydraulic system parts so badly that
they will have to be replaced. Do not let
someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.
If brake fluid is spilled on the vehicle's
painted surfaces, the paint finish can be
damaged. Be careful not to spill brake
fluid on the vehicle. If you do, wash it off
immediately. See Washing Your Vehicle on
page 6‑82.
Brake Wear
This vehicle has front disc brakes and could have rear
drum brakes or rear disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make
a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads are
worn and new pads are needed. The sound can come
and go or be heard all the time the vehicle is moving,
except when applying the brake pedal firmly.
{ WARNING:
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
the brakes will not work well. That could lead to
an accident. When the brake wear warning sound
is heard, have the vehicle serviced.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
the brakes.
6-35
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated,
inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel
nuts in the proper sequence to torque specifications in
Capacities and Specifications on page 6‑93.
If the vehicle has rear drum brakes, they do not have
wear indicators, but if a rear brake rubbing noise
is heard, have the rear brake linings inspected
immediately. Rear brake drums should be removed
and inspected each time the tires are removed for
rotation or changing. When the front brake pads are
replaced, have the rear brakes inspected, too.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal does not
return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign that brake service
might be required.
6-36
Brake Adjustment
Every moderate brake stop, the disc brakes adjust for
wear. If rarely making moderate or heavier brake stops,
the brakes might not adjust correctly. Very carefully
making a few moderate brake stops about every
1 600 km (1,000 miles) will adjust the brakes properly.
If the vehicle has rear drum brakes and the brake pedal
goes down farther than normal, the rear drum brakes
might need adjustment. Adjust them by backing up and
firmly applying the brakes a few times.
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. The vehicle
was designed and tested with top-quality brake parts.
When parts of the braking system are replaced — for
example, when the brake linings wear down and new
ones are installed — be sure to get new approved
replacement parts. If this is not done, the brakes might
not work properly. For example, if someone puts in
brake linings that are wrong for the vehicle, the balance
between the front and rear brakes can change — for the
worse. The braking performance expected can change
in many other ways if the wrong replacement brake
parts are installed.
Battery
Refer to the replacement number on the original battery
label when a new battery is needed. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 6‑14 for battery
location.
{ DANGER:
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer
and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
Vehicle Storage
{ WARNING:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you are
not careful. See Jump Starting on page 6‑38 for
tips on working around a battery without
getting hurt.
Infrequent Usage: Remove the black, negative (−) cable
from the battery to keep the battery from running down.
Extended Storage: Remove the black, negative (−)
cable from the battery or use a battery trickle charger.
6-37
Jump Starting
If the vehicle's battery has run down, you may want to
use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start
your vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it
safely.
{ WARNING:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
.
They contain acid that can burn you.
.
They contain gas that can explode or ignite.
.
They contain enough electricity to burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or
all of these things can hurt you.
6-38
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to the vehicle that would not be covered by
the warranty.
Trying to start the vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage the vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
Notice: If the other vehicle's system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper
cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not
touching each other. If they are, it could cause a
ground connection you do not want. You would
not be able to start your vehicle, and the bad
grounding could damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved
in the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in P (Park) or a manual transmission
in N (Neutral) before setting the parking brake.
Notice: If you leave the radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by
the warranty. Always turn off the radio and other
accessories when jump starting the vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the
cigarette lighter or the accessory power outlet.
Turn off the radio and all lamps that are not
needed. This will avoid sparks and help save both
batteries. And it could save the radio!
4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find the
positive (+) and negative (−) terminal locations on
each vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 6‑14 for more information on location.
{ WARNING:
{ WARNING:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this,
and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if
you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do not
need to add water to the battery installed in your
new vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, be
sure the right amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
add water to take care of that first. If you don't,
explosive gas could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you. Do
not get it on you. If you accidentally get it in your
eyes or on your skin, flush the place with water
and get medical help immediately.
An electric fan can start up even when the engine
is not running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
6-39
{ WARNING:
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you
badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts
once the engine is running.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose
or missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you
will get a short that would damage the battery and
maybe other parts too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
6-40
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the
positive (+) terminal of the dead battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the dead
battery.
6-41
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable
at least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead
battery, but not near engine parts that move.
The electrical connection is just as good there, and
the chance of sparks getting back to the battery is
much less.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always
connect and remove the jumper cables in the
correct order, making sure that the cables do not
touch each other or other metal.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (–) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
6-42
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do
the following:
Bulb Replacement
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
Replacement Bulbs on page 6‑49.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer/retailer.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
Halogen Bulbs
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
Headlamp Aiming
Headlamp aim has been preset at the factory and
should need no further adjustment.
However, if your vehicle is damaged in a crash, the
headlamp aim may be affected. Aim adjustment to the
low-beam headlamps may be necessary if oncoming
drivers flash their high-beam headlamps at you (for
vertical aim).
{ WARNING:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions on the bulb package.
If the headlamps need to be re-aimed, it is
recommended that you take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer for service.
6-43
Headlamps
To replace a headlamp bulb:
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 6‑12.
4. Remove the headlamp cap.
5. Release the spring that retains the bulb by
loosening the screw.
6. Remove the old bulb and install the new bulb.
7. Install the bulb retaining spring and tighten the
screw.
2. Remove the three bolts to remove the headlamp
assembly.
3. Disconnect the wiring harness connector from the
rear of the bulb.
6-44
8. Reinstall the headlamp cap.
9. Reconnect the wiring harness at the rear of
the bulb.
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and
Parking Lamps
To replace a front turn signal or parking lamp bulb:
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 6‑12
for more information.
10. Reinstall the headlamp assembly using the three
bolts.
2. Remove the three bolts to remove the headlamp
assembly.
3. Disconnect the wiring harness connector from the
rear of the bulb.
6-45
7. Install the new bulb into the socket by pressing it in
and turning it clockwise.
8. Install the socket into the lamp housing by turning
it clockwise.
9. Reconnect the wiring harness connector at the rear
of the bulb.
4. Turn the front turn signal bulb socket
counterclockwise.
5. Pull the front turn signal bulb socket out of the
lamp housing.
6. Press the bulb inward and turn it counterclockwise
to remove it from the bulb socket.
10. Reinstall the headlamp assembly using the three
bolts.
6-46
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
(CHMSL) (Hatchback)
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
(CHMSL) (Sedan)
To replace a CHMSL bulb on the hatchback:
To replace a CHMSL bulb on the sedan:
1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate (Hatchback) on
page 3‑10 for more information.
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 3‑8 for more
information.
2. Remove the two screws and the lamp housing.
Disconnect the wiring harness connector before
removing the lamp housing.
2. Pull down on the lamp assembly while holding the
end of the bracket.
3. Remove the lens cover using a flat head
screwdriver.
4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out of the
bulb holder.
3. Remove the five screws and the reflector
assembly.
5. Install the new bulb.
4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out of the
bulb holder.
6. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall.
5. Install the new bulb.
6. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall.
6-47
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps
To replace a taillamp, turn signal lamp, stoplamp,
or back-up bulb:
1. Open the liftgate or trunk. See Liftgate (Hatchback)
on page 3‑10 or Trunk on page 3‑8.
Sedan
2. Remove the two screws and the lamp assembly.
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove
the socket.
4. Press the bulb in and turn counterclockwise to
remove from the socket.
Hatchback
5. Press the new bulb in and turn clockwise to install
the bulb into the socket.
6. Turn the bulb socket clockwise to reinstall.
7. Reinstall the lamp assembly and two screws.
6-48
License Plate Lamp
To replace one of these bulbs:
5. Push the bulb straight into the socket and turn
clockwise to reinstall.
6. Push and turn the license plate lamp away from
you through the opening.
7. Reinstall the two screws holding the license
plate lamp.
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp
Back-Up Lamps
1. Remove the two screws holding each of the
license plate lamps.
2. Turn and pull the license plate lamp toward you
through the opening.
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull the
bulb straight out of the socket.
Bulb Number
94535571
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
(CHMSL)
94535587
Front Parking/Turn Signal Lamps
94535578
Front Sidemarker Lamps
94535578
Headlamps
94535548
License Plate Lamp
94535587
Rear Sidemarker Lamps
94535577
Rear Turn Signal Lamps
94535572
Stoplamp/Taillamps
94535577
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your
dealer/retailer.
4. Install the new bulb.
6-49
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear
or cracking. See “Wiper Blade Check” for more
information.
Here is how to remove and replace the windshield wiper
blade:
1. Pull the windshield wiper arm away from the
windshield.
Replacement blades come in different types and
are removed in different ways. For the proper type,
see Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 7‑13.
2. Press the retaining clip (A) and pull the wiper blade
off the arm.
3. Install a new blade by reversing Steps 1 and 2.
6-50
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever
have questions about your tire warranty and
where to obtain service, see your vehicle
Warranty booklet for details. For additional
information refer to the tire manufacturer.
WARNING: (Continued)
.
Underinflated tires pose the same
danger as overloaded tires. The resulting
accident could cause serious injury.
Check all tires frequently to maintain the
recommended pressure. Tire pressure
should be checked when your vehicle's
tires are cold. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 6‑58.
.
Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
If the tire's tread is badly worn, or if your
vehicle's tires have been damaged,
replace them.
{ WARNING:
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
.
Overloading your vehicle's tires can
cause overheating as a result of too
much flexing. You could have an air-out
and a serious accident. See Loading the
Vehicle on page 5‑15.
(Continued)
6-51
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into its
sidewall. The examples below show a typical
passenger car tire and a compact spare tire
sidewall.
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire's width, height, aspect ratio, construction
type and service description. See the “Tire Size”
illustration later in this section for more detail.
(B) DOT (Department of Transportation) : The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN) : The letters
and numbers following DOT code are the Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the
manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date
the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded
onto both sides of the tire, although only one side
may have the date of manufacture.
(D) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the
tread.
Passenger Car Tire Example
6-52
(E) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG) : Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires based
on three performance factors: treadwear, traction
and temperature resistance. For more information
see Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 6‑66.
(F) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit :
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
For information on recommended tire pressure
see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6‑58 and
Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑15.
(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact spare
tire or temporary use tire has a tread life of
approximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should
not be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).
The compact spare tire is for emergency use
when a regular road tire has lost air and gone flat.
See Compact Spare Tire on page 6‑78 and If a
Tire Goes Flat on page 6‑69.
(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the
tread.
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN) : The Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the
manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date
the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded
onto both sides of the tire, although only one side
may have the date of manufacture.
Compact Spare Tire Example
6-53
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit :
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
See Compact Spare Tire on page 6‑78 and
Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑15.
Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example of a
typical passenger car tire size.
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or
compact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi
(420 kPa). For more information on tire pressure
and inflation see Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 6‑58.
(F) Tire Size : A combination of letters and
numbers define a tire's width, height, aspect ratio,
construction type and service description. The
letter T as the first character in the tire size means
the tire is for temporary use only.
(A) Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire: The United
States version of a metric tire sizing system.
The letter P as the first character in the tire size
means a passenger vehicle tire engineered to
standards set by the U. S. Tire and Rim
Association.
(B) Tire Width: The three‐digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.
6-54
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digit number that
indicates the tire height‐to‐width measurements.
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 70, as
shown in item C of the illustration, it would mean
that the tire's sidewall is 70% as high as it is wide.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used
to indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.
The letter R means radial ply construction; the
letter D means diagonal or bias ply construction;
and the letter B means belted‐bias ply
construction.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire
pressing outward on each square inch of the tire.
Air pressure is expressed in pounds per square
inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
Accessory Weight: This means the combined
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are, automatic transmission,
power steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, and air conditioning.
(E) Rim Diameter : Diameter of the wheel in
inches.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire's height to
its width.
(F) Service Description: These characters
represent the load index and speed rating of the
tire. The load index represents the load carry
capacity a tire is certified to carry. The speed
rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified to
carry a load.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is
located between the plies and the tread. Cords
may be made from steel or other reinforcing
materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees
to the centerline of the tread.
6-55
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure
in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi)
or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat
from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 6‑58.
Curb Weight: The weight of a motor vehicle with
standard and optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, but
without passengers and cargo.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN), an
alphanumeric designator which can also identify
the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand, and
date of production.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.
See Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑15.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
front axle. See Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑15.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear
axle. See Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑15.
6-56
Intended Outboard Sidewall : The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward
when mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire: A tire used on light
duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from
1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying
capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum
air pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire
at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for
that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity
weight, and production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
by 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading the Vehicle on
page 5‑15.
Occupant Distribution : Designated seating
positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that
faces outward when mounted on a vehicle. The
side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,
and/or model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same moldings on the other
sidewall of the tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure : Vehicle
manufacturer's recommended tire inflation
pressure as shown on the tire placard. See
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6‑58 and Loading
the Vehicle on page 5‑15.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the
ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at
90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which
the tire beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread
and the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned
to a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a
tire can operate.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the
road surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of
a tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
remains. See When It Is Time for New Tires on
page 6‑64.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards): A tire information system that
provides consumers with ratings for a tire's
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings
are determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Tire Quality Grading on page 6‑66.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of
designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs
(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See Loading the
Vehicle on page 5‑15.
6-57
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on
an individual tire due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached
to a vehicle showing the vehicle's capacity
weight and the original equipment tire size and
recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire and
Loading Information Label” under Loading the
Vehicle on page 5‑15.
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to
operate effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under‐inflation or over‐inflation is all right.
It is not. If your tires do not have enough air
(under‐inflation), you can get the following:
.
Too much flexing
.
Too much heat
.
Tire overloading
.
Premature or irregular wear
.
Poor handling
.
Reduced fuel economy
6-58
If your tires have too much air (over‐inflation),
you can get the following:
.
Unusual wear
.
Poor handling
.
Rough ride
.
Needless damage from road hazards
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to your vehicle. This label shows
your vehicle's original equipment tires and the
correct inflation pressures for your tires when they
are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation
pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum
amount of air pressure needed to support your
vehicle's maximum load carrying capacity.
For additional information regarding how much
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example
of the Tire and Loading Information label, see
Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑15. How you load
your vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride
comfort. Never load your vehicle with more weight
than it was designed to carry.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more. Do not
forget to check the compact spare tire, it should
be at 60 psi (420 kPa). For additional information
regarding the compact spare tire, see Compact
Spare Tire on page 6‑78.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.
Re‐check the tire pressure with the tire gauge.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
How to Check
Tire Pressure Monitor System
Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to check
tire pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are
properly inflated simply by looking at them.
Radial tires may look properly inflated even
when they are under‐inflated. Check the tire's
inflation pressure when the tires are cold.
Cold means your vehicle has been sitting for
at least three hours or driven no more than
1 mile (1.6 km).
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio
and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels.
The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in your
vehicle's tires and transmit tire pressure readings to a
receiver located in the vehicle.
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
Press the tire gauge firmly onto the valve to get a
pressure measurement. If the cold tire inflation
pressure matches the recommended pressure on
the Tire and Loading Information label, no further
adjustment is necessary. If the inflation pressure
is low, add air until you reach the recommended
amount.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure
label, you should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under‐inflated.
6-59
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly under‐inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under‐inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under‐inflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash
for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start‐ups as long as the
malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur
for a variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.
6-60
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle
to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 6‑60 for
additional information.
Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Industry
Canada
See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8‑20 for
information regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and
RSS-210/211 of Industry Canada.
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation
This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS). The TPMS is designed to warn the driver when
a low tire pressure condition exists. If your vehicle has
this feature, the TPMS sensors are mounted onto each
tire and wheel assembly, excluding the spare tire and
wheel assembly. The TPMS sensors monitor the air
pressure in your vehicle's tires and transmit tire
pressure readings to a receiver located in the vehicle.
When a low tire pressure
condition is detected, the
TPMS illuminates the low
tire pressure warning light
on the instrument panel
cluster.
The low tire pressure warning light comes on at each
ignition cycle until the tires are inflated to the correct
inflation pressure.
The tire pressure warning light may come on in cool
weather when the vehicle is first started, and then turn
off as you start to drive. This could be an early indicator
that the tire pressures are getting low and need to be
inflated to the proper pressure.
A Tire and Loading Information label, attached to
your vehicle, shows the size of your vehicle's original
equipment tires and the correct inflation pressure for
your vehicle's tires when they are cold. See Loading
the Vehicle on page 5‑15, for an example of the tire
information label and its location on your vehicle. Also
see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6‑58.
Your vehicle's TPMS system can warn you about a low
tire pressure condition but it does not replace normal
tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 6‑62 and Tires on page 6‑51.
Notice: Liquid tire sealants could damage the Tire
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensors. Sensor
damage caused by using a tire sealant is not
covered by your warranty. Do not use liquid tire
sealants.
TPMS Malfunction Light
The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of
the TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When the
system detects a malfunction, the low tire warning light
flashes for about one minute and then stays on for the
remainder of the ignition cycle. The low tire warning
light comes on at each ignition cycle until the problem
is corrected. Some of the conditions that can cause the
malfunction light to come on are:
.
One of the road tires has been replaced with the
spare tire. The spare tire does not have a TPMS
sensor. The TPMS malfunction light should go off
once you re‐install the road tire containing the
TPMS sensor.
.
One or more TPMS sensors are missing or
damaged. The TPMS malfunction light should
go off when the TPMS sensors are installed
and the sensor matching process is performed
successfully. See your dealer/retailer for service.
6-61
.
.
Replacement tires or wheels do not match your
vehicle's original equipment tires or wheels.
Tires and wheels other than those recommended
for your vehicle could prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. See Buying New Tires on
page 6‑64.
Operating electronic devices or being near facilities
using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS
could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction.
If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or signal
a low tire condition. See your dealer/retailer for service
if the TPMS malfunction light comes on and stays on.
TPMS Sensor Identification Codes
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code.
Any time you replace one or more of the TPMS
sensors, or rotate the vehicle's tires, the identification
codes need to be matched to the new tire/wheel
position. The sensors are matched, to the tire/wheel
positions, in the following order: driver side front tire,
passenger side front tire, passenger side rear tire, and
driver side rear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool. See
your dealer/retailer for service.
6-62
Tire Inspection and Rotation
We recommend that you regularly inspect your
vehicle's tires, including the spare tire, for signs
of wear or damage. See When It Is Time for New
Tires on page 6‑64 for more information.
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km). See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 7‑3.
The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to achieve
a uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. This will
ensure that your vehicle continues to perform
most like it did when the tires were new.
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your
tires as soon as possible and check wheel
alignment. Also check for damaged tires or
wheels. See When It Is Time for New Tires on
page 6‑64 and Wheel Replacement on page 6‑68
for more information.
{ WARNING:
When rotating your tires, always use the correct
rotation pattern shown here.
Do not include the compact spare tire in the tire
rotation.
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a
cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be
sure to use a scraper or wire brush later,
if needed, to get all the rust or dirt off.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 6‑70.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front
and rear inflation pressures as shown on the tire
and loading information label. See Loading the
Vehicle on page 5‑15 for an example of the tire
and loading information label and where it is
located on your vehicle. Make certain that all
wheel nuts are properly tightened. See “Wheel
Nut Torque” under Capacities and Specifications
on page 6‑93.
6-63
When It Is Time for New Tires
Various factors, such as maintenance, temperatures,
driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions
influence when you need new tires.
One way to tell when it is
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread
remaining.
.
The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
.
The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that
cannot be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
The rubber in tires degrades over time, even if they
are not being used. This is also true for the spare tire,
if your vehicle has one. Multiple conditions affect how
fast this aging takes place, including temperatures,
loading conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance.
With proper care and maintenance tires will typically
wear out before they degrade due to age. If you are
unsure about the need to replace your tires as they get
older, consult the tire manufacturer for more information.
Buying New Tires
You need new tires if any of the following statements
are true:
.
You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
.
You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire's rubber.
.
The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
6-64
GM has developed and matched specific tires for your
vehicle. If you need replacement tires, GM strongly
recommends that you get tires that are the same size,
brand, load range, speed rating, and construction type
(radial and bias‐belted tires) as your vehicle's original
tires. This way, your vehicle will continue to have tires
that are designed to give the same performance and
vehicle safety, during normal use, as the original tires.
See Tire Sidewall Labeling on page 6‑52 for additional
information.
GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four. This is
because uniform tread depth on all tires will help keep
your vehicle performing most like it did when the tires
were new. Replacing less than a full set of tires can
affect the braking and handling performance of your
vehicle. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 6‑62.
{ WARNING:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose
control while driving. If you mix tires of
different sizes, brands, or types (radial and
bias-belted tires), the vehicle may not handle
properly, and you could have a crash. Using
tires of different sizes, brands, or types may
also cause damage to your vehicle. Be sure
to use the correct size, brand, and type of
tires on all wheels. It is all right to drive with
your compact spare temporarily, as it was
developed for use on your vehicle. See
Compact Spare Tire on page 6‑78.
{ WARNING:
If you use bias-ply tires on the vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use
only radial-ply tires with the wheels on the
vehicle.
Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring system
could give an inaccurate low‐pressure warning if tires
not recommended for your vehicle are installed. Tires
that do not match the original equipment tires could
give a low‐pressure warning that is higher or lower than
the proper warning level you would get with original
equipment tires. See Tire Pressure Monitor System on
page 6‑59.
Your vehicle's original equipment tires are listed on the
Tire and Loading Information Label. See Loading the
Vehicle on page 5‑15, for more information about the
Tire and Loading Information label and its location on
your vehicle.
6-65
Different Size Tires and Wheels
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than
your original equipment wheels and tires, this may
affect the way your vehicle performs, including its
braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability, and
resistance to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle has
electronic systems such as, antilock brakes, traction
control, and electronic stability control, the performance
of these systems can be affected.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum selection width. For example:
{ WARNING:
If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle
may not provide an acceptable level of
performance and safety if tires not recommended
for those wheels are selected. You may increase
the chance that you will crash and suffer serious
injury. Only use GM specific wheel and tire
systems developed for your vehicle, and have
them properly installed by a GM certified
technician.
See Buying New Tires on page 6‑64 and Accessories
and Modifications on page 6‑4 for additional
information.
6-66
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the Unites States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which
grades tires by treadwear, traction, and
temperature performance. This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use spare
tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they must also conform
to federal safety requirements.
All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal
Safety Requirements In Addition To These
Grades.
Treadwear
Temperature — A, B, C
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and a half (1½) times
as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the
tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation,
or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure.
Traction — AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the
tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance. Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead
braking traction tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
6-67
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned and
balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest
tire life and best overall performance. Adjustments
to wheel alignment and tire balancing will not be
necessary on a regular basis. However, if you notice
unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling to one side or
the other, the alignment might need to be checked.
If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a
smooth road, the tires and wheels might need to be
rebalanced. See your dealer/retailer for proper
diagnosis.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly
rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose,
the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts should be
replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer/retailer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheel
you need.
6-68
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset, and be mounted the
same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts,
wheel nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensors, replace them only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the
right wheel, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, and TPMS sensors
for your vehicle.
{ WARNING:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts,
or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous.
It could affect the braking and handling of your
vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you
lose control. You could have a collision in which
you or others could be injured. Always use the
correct wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for
replacement.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 6‑70 for more
information.
Used Replacement Wheels
Drive slowly and follow the chain manufacturer's
instructions. If youcan hear the chains contacting
your vehicle, stop and retighten them. If the
contactcontinues, slow down until it stops. Driving
too fast or spinning the wheels withchains on will
damage your vehicle.
If a Tire Goes Flat
{ WARNING:
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving,
especially if you maintain your vehicle's tires properly.
If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out
slowly. But if you should ever have a blowout, here are
a few tips about what to expect and what to do:
Putting a used wheel on the vehicle is dangerous.
You cannot know how it has been used or how
far it has been driven. It could fail suddenly and
cause a crash. If you have to replace a wheel,
use a new GM original equipment wheel.
If a front tire fails, the flat tire creates a drag that pulls
the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake
to a stop well out of the traffic lane.
Tire Chains
Notice: Use tire chains only where legal and
only when you must. Use only SAE Class“S”
type chains that are the proper size for your tires.
Install themon the front tires and tighten them as
tightly as possible with the ends securelyfastened.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much
like a skid and may require the same correction
you would use in a skid. In any rear blowout
remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
6-69
Get the vehicle under control by steering the way you
want the vehicle to go. It may be very bumpy and noisy,
but you can still steer. Gently brake to a stop, well off
the road if possible.
{ WARNING:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the
appropriate safety equipment and training. If a
jack is provided with the vehicle, it is designed
only for changing a flat tire. If it is used for
anything else, you or others could be badly
injured or killed if the vehicle slips off the jack.
If a jack is provided with the vehicle, only use it
for changing a flat tire.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use the
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on the hazard
warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers on
page 4‑3.
6-70
{ WARNING:
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you or
other people. You and they could be badly injured
or even killed. Find a level place to change your
tire. To help prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put an automatic transmission shift lever in
P (Park), or shift a manual transmission to
1 (First) or R (Reverse).
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart while
the vehicle is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in the
vehicle.
To be even more certain the vehicle will not move,
you should put blocks at the front and rear of the
tire farthest away from the one being changed.
That would be the tire on the other side, at the
opposite end of the vehicle.
When the vehicle has a flat tire (B), use the following
example as a guide to assist you in the placement of
wheel blocks (A).
A. Wheel Block
B. Flat Tire
The following information explains how to use the jack
and change a tire.
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The compact spare tire and tools you will need are
located in the trunk.
A. Jack
C. Jack Handle
B. Wheel Wrench
D. Screwdriver (if equipped)
1. Open the trunk or liftgate. See Trunk on page 3‑8
or Liftgate (Hatchback) on page 3‑10.
2. Lift the trim cover.
6-71
3. Remove the foam tray.
4. Remove the jack, the jack handle and the wheel
wrench from the foam tray.
6-72
5. Turn the retainer counterclockwise and remove it
from the compact spare.
6. Remove the compact spare tire. See Compact
Spare Tire on page 6‑78 for more information.
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing
the Spare Tire
1. Do a safety check before proceeding.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 6‑70.
2. If your vehicle has wheel covers, turn the four
plastic caps counterclockwise by hand or by using
the wheel wrench. The plastic nuts do not come off
of the cover.
3. Remove the wheel cover using the flat end of the
jack handle. Pry along the edge of the wheel cover
until it comes off.
Store the wheel cover in the cargo area until you
have the flat tire repaired or replaced.
4. Turn the wheel nuts counterclockwise to loosen
them. Do not remove them yet.
6-73
Hatchback
Sedan
5. Locate the notch in the frame near each wheel
which the jack head fits in.
6. Position the jack and raise the jack head until it fits
firmly into the notch in the vehicle's frame nearest
the flat tire.
7. Put the compact spare tire near you.
6-74
{ WARNING:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under a
vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
{ WARNING:
8. Insert the jack handle into the jack and the wheel
wrench onto the end of the jack handle.
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack
lift head into the proper location before raising the
vehicle.
9. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the
vehicle. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground so there is enough room for the compact
spare tire to fit underneath the wheel well.
6-75
10. Turn the wheel nuts counterclockwise to
remove them.
12. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces and
spare wheel.
11. Remove the flat tire.
{ WARNING:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it
is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose
after time. The wheel could come off and cause
an accident. When changing a wheel, remove any
rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches
to the vehicle. In an emergency, use a cloth or
a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get all
the rust or dirt off. See Changing a Flat Tire on
page 6‑70.
13. Place the compact spare tire on the
wheel-mounting surface.
{ WARNING:
Never use oil or grease on bolts or nuts because
the nuts might come loose. The vehicle's wheel
could fall off, causing a crash.
6-76
14. Install the wheel nuts with the rounded end of the
nuts toward the wheel. Tighten each nut by hand
clockwise until the wheel is held against the hub.
15. Lower the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
{ WARNING:
Wheel nuts that are improperly or incorrectly
tightened can cause the wheels to become
loose or come off. The wheel nuts should be
tightened with a torque wrench to the proper
torque specification after replacing. Follow the
torque specification supplied by the aftermarket
manufacturer when using accessory locking wheel
nuts. See Capacities and Specifications on
page 6‑93 for original equipment wheel nut
torque specifications.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the
wheel nuts in the proper sequence and to the
proper torque specification. See Capacities and
Specifications on page 6‑93 for the wheel nut
torque specification.
16. Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
sequence, as shown.
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your vehicle's
compact spare. If you try to put a wheel cover on
the compact spare, the cover or the spare could be
damaged.
6-77
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and
Tools
{ WARNING:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose
equipment could strike someone. Store all these
in the proper place.
To store a flat or compact spare tire and tools:
1. Store the flat tire or the compact spare in the
compact spare tire compartment.
2. Secure the retainer.
3. Store the tools securely in the foam tray and place
the tray back in the cargo area.
4. Replace the trim cover.
The compact spare tire is for temporary use only.
Replace the compact spare tire with a full-size tire
as soon as you can. See Compact Spare Tire on
page 6‑78.
6-78
Compact Spare Tire
{ WARNING:
Driving with more than one compact spare tire at
a time could result in loss of braking and handling.
This could lead to a crash and you or others could
be injured. Use only one compact spare tire at
a time.
The compact spare tire was fully inflated when the
vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time. Check
the inflation pressure regularly. It should be 60 psi
(414 kPa).
After installing the compact spare on your vehicle, you
should stop as soon as possible and make sure your
spare tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare is
intended to perform well at speeds up to 50 mph
(80 km/h), so you can finish your trip and have your
full-size tire repaired or replaced where you want.
Replace your spare with a full-size tire as soon as
you can.
Notice: When the compact spare is installed, do not
take the vehicle through an automatic car wash with
guide rails. The compact spare can get caught on
the rails which can damage the tire, wheel and other
parts of the vehicle.
Do not use your compact spare on other vehicles.
Do not mix your compact spare tire or wheel with other
wheels or tires. Keep your spare tire and its wheel
together.
Notice: Tire chains will not fit the compact spare.
Using them can damage the vehicle and can
damage the chains too. Do not use tire chains on
the compact spare.
Appearance Care
Interior Cleaning
The vehicle's interior will continue to look its best if
it is cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust
and dirt can accumulate on the upholstery. Dirt can
damage carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces.
Regular vacuuming is recommended to remove
particles from the upholstery. It is important to keep
the upholstery from becoming and remaining heavily
soiled. Soils should be removed as quickly as possible.
The vehicle's interior may experience extremes of heat
that could cause stains to set rapidly.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments
that transfer color to home furnishings may also transfer
color to the vehicle's interior.
When cleaning the vehicle's interior, only use cleaners
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners
on surfaces for which they were not intended. Use
glass cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental
over-spray from other surfaces immediately. To prevent
over-spray, apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
Notice: Using abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on the vehicle, could scratch the
glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger. When cleaning the glass on the vehicle,
use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in the vehicle's breathing space.
Before using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety
instructions on the label. While cleaning the vehicle's
interior, maintain adequate ventilation by opening the
vehicle's doors and windows.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
using a small brush with soft bristles.
6-79
Products that remove odors from the vehicle's
upholstery and clean the vehicle's glass can be
obtained from your dealer/retailer.
Do not clean the vehicle using:
.
A knife or any other sharp object to remove a soil
from any interior surface.
.
A stiff brush. It can cause damage to the vehicle's
interior surfaces.
.
Heavy pressure or aggressive rubbing with a
cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure can damage
the interior and does not improve the effectiveness
of soil removal.
.
Laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with
degreasers can leave residue that streaks and
attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops per
gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide. Use only
mild, neutral-pH soaps.
.
Too much cleaner that saturates the upholstery.
.
Organic solvents such as naptha, alcohol, etc. that
can damage the vehicle's interior.
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be
used on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For any
soil, always try to remove it first with plain water or club
soda. Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the
soil as possible using one of the following techniques:
.
For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a
paper towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the paper
towel until no more can be removed.
.
For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible
and then vacuum.
To clean:
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or
club soda.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process that
was used with plain water.
6-80
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner
or spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test a
small hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locally
cleaned area gives any impression that a ring formation
may result, clean the entire surface.
After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper
towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the
fabric or carpet.
Leather
A soft cloth dampened with water can be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can
be used. Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use
heat to dry. Never use steam to clean leather. Never
use spot lifters or spot removers on leather. Many
commercial leather cleaners and coatings that are
sold to preserve and protect leather may permanently
change the appearance and feel of the leather and are
not recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to
clean the vehicle's interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner. Never use shoe polish on leather.
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution
can be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never
use spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces. Many
commercial cleaners and coatings that are sold to
preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces may
permanently change the appearance and feel of the
interior and are not recommended. Do not use silicone
or wax-based products, or those containing organic
solvents to clean the vehicle's interior because they
can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in a
non-uniform manner.
Some commercial products may increase gloss on the
instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make
it difficult to see through the windshield under certain
conditions.
6-81
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
{ WARNING:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. It may severely
weaken them. In a crash, they might not be able
to provide adequate protection. Clean safety belts
only with mild soap and lukewarm water.
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Use a car
washing soap. Do not use cleaning agents that are
petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives, as
they can damage the paint, metal or plastic on the
vehicle. Approved cleaning products can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer. Follow all manufacturers'
directions regarding correct product usage, necessary
safety precautions and appropriate disposal of any
vehicle care product.
Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after to
remove all cleaning agents completely. If they are
allowed to dry on the surface, they could stain.
Weatherstrips
Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton
towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter the
vehicle. Avoid using high pressure washes closer than
12 inches (30 cm) to the surface of the vehicle. Use of
power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa) can
result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve the vehicle's finish is to keep
it clean by washing it often.
Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that can
damage the emblems or nameplates on the vehicle.
Check the cleaning product label. If it states that it
should not be used on plastic parts, do not use it on
the vehicle or damage may occur and it would not
be covered by the warranty.
6-82
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a
car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle on
page 6‑82.
Finish Care
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the
paint finish. Approved cleaning products can be
obtained from your dealer/retailer.
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, chrome polish may be used on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
If the vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, the
clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint
finish.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid
damaging protective trim, never use auto or chrome
polish, steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum.
A coating of wax, rubbed to high polish, is
recommended for all bright metal parts.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish
may damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on the vehicle.
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can
damage the vehicle's finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible.
If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are
marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign
matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period
of years. To help keep the paint finish looking new, keep
the vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible.
Clean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner.
Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or paper
towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a mild
detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly when
cleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and a
buildup of vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause
wiper streaking. Replace the wiper blades if they are
worn or damaged.
Wipers can be damaged by:
.
Extreme dusty conditions
.
Sand and salt
.
Heat and sun
.
Snow and ice, without proper removal
6-83
Aluminum Wheels
Notice: Using strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive
polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners that contain
acid on aluminum or chrome-plated wheels, could
damage the surface of the wheel(s). The repairs
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Use only approved cleaners on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Use chrome polish
on chrome wheels only.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because the surface could be damaged. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Notice: Driving the vehicle through an automatic
car wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning
brushes, could damage the aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Never drive a
vehicle that has aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Tires
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on the vehicle may damage the paint finish
and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing, always
wipe off any overspray from all painted surfaces on
the vehicle.
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the vehicle
warranty.
6-84
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal will
corrode quickly and may develop into major repair
expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with
touch-up materials available from your dealer/retailer.
Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your
dealer's/retailer's body and paint shop.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where
mud and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas
of the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer/retailer or an underbody car washing
system can do this.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage
can take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,
and small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint
surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, we will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of new
vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
6-85
Vehicle Identification
Service Parts Identification Label
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
This label, on the inside of the glove box, has the
following information:
.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
.
Model designation
.
Paint information
.
Production options and special equipment
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.
This legal identifier is in the front corner of the
instrument panel, on the driver side. It can be seen
through the windshield from outside. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and certificates of title and registration.
Engine Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code.
This code identifies the vehicle's engine, specifications,
and replacement parts. See “Engine Specifications”
under Capacities and Specifications on page 6‑93 for
the vehicle's engine code.
6-86
Electrical System
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to the vehicle
unless you check with your dealer/retailer first.
Some electrical equipment can damage the vehicle
and the damage would not be covered by the
vehicle's warranty. Some add-on electrical
equipment can keep other components from
working as they should.
Add-on equipment can drain the vehicle battery, even if
the vehicle is not operating.
The vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to the vehicle, see Servicing
Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 2‑70 and
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 2‑71.
Headlamp Wiring
The headlamp wiring is protected by fuses in the fuse
block. An electrical overload will cause the lamps to turn
off. If this happens, have the headlamp wiring checked
right away.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit
breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy
snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools.
If the overload is caused by some electrical problem,
have it fixed.
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Circuit breakers in the fuse block protect the power
windows and other power accessories. When the
current load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and
closes, protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed or
goes away.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in the vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers
and fusible thermal links. This greatly reduces the
chance of fires caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size
and rating.
Fuses of the same amperage can be temporarily
borrowed from another fuse location, if a fuse goes out.
Replace the fuse as soon as you can.
6-87
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
The instrument panel fuse block is located on the end of
the instrument panel on the driver side of the vehicle.
Fuses
To access the fuses, open the fuse panel door by
pulling the door out.
To reinstall the door, first insert the rear edge of the fuse
panel door, then push the front of the door into the end
of the instrument panel to secure it.
6-88
AUDIO
Usage
Audio, Clock, Immobilizer
AUDIO/RKE
A/C Switch, Clock, Power Mirror Unit,
Audio, Anti-Theft Module, TPMS
B/UP LAMP
PNP Switch, Reverse Lamp Switch
BLANK
Not Used
BLANK
Not Used
BLANK
Not Used
CIGAR
Cigar Lighter
Fuses
CLUSTER
DEFOG
MIRROR
Usage
Brake Switch, TPMS, Anti‐Theft
Module
Power Mirror Unit, A/C Switch
RR DEFOG
Rear Defog
DOOR LOCK
Door Lock
NA DRL
MIRROR/
SUNROOF
EMS 1
NA DRL Circuit
Mirror Control Switch, Room Lamp,
A/C Switch
Engine Room Fuse Block, TCM, VSS,
Fuel Pump
EMS 2
Stoplamp Switch
HORN
Horn
OBD
DLC, Immobilizer
CLUSTER/
ROOM LAMP
Trunk Room Lamp, Trunk Open
Switch, IPC, Room Lamp
SDM
Sensing and Diagnostic Module
Fuses
SOKET
STOP LAMP
SUNROOF
T/SIG
WIPER
Usage
Power Jack
Brake Switch
Sunroof Module (Option)
Hazard Switch
Wiper Switch, Wiper Motor
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
The engine compartment fuse block is located on the
driver side of the vehicle, near the battery. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 6‑14 for more
information on location.
Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components
on the vehicle may damage it. Always keep the
covers on any electrical component.
To access the fuses, press in the side flaps to release
the cover. To reinstall the cover, push the cover until it is
secure.
6-89
Fuses
6-90
Usage
Fuses
FAN HI
Cooling Fan HI Relay
SJB BATT
ABS‐1
EBCM
ACC/IG1
ABS‐2
EBCM
IG2/ST
Usage
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
IGN1 Relay
IGN2 Relay, Starter Relay
Fuses
ACC/RAP
P/WINDOW‐2
P/W WINDOW‐1
FAN LOW
A/CON
PKLP LH
PKLP RH
ECU
FRT FOG
F/PUMP
Usage
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
Power Window Switch
Power Window Switch
Cooling Fan LOW Relay
A/C Compressor Relay
Tail Lamp (LH), Side Marker (LH),
Turn Signal & Parking Lamp (LH),
License Lamp
Tail Lamp (RH), Side Marker (RH),
Turn Signal & Parking Lamp (RH),
License Lamp, I/P Fuse Block
ECM, TCM
Front Fog Lamp Relay
Fuel Pump Relay
Fuses
HAZARD
HDLP HI LH
HDLP HI RH
IPC
HDLP LO LH
HDLP LO RH
EMS‐1
DLIS
EMS‐2
SPARE
Usage
Hazard Switch, Hood Contact Switch
Head Lamp (LH), IPC
Head Lamp (RH)
IPC
Head Lamp (LH), I/P Fuse Block
Head Lamp (RH)
ECM, Injector
Ignition Switch
EVAP Canister Purge Solenoid,
Thermostat Heater, HO2S, MAF
Sensor
Not Used
6-91
Relays
F/PUMP RELAY
STARTER
RELAY
PARK LAMP
RELAY
FRONT FOG
RELAY
HDLP HIGH
RELAY
HDLP LOW
RELAY
FAN HIGH
RELAY
6-92
Usage
Fuel Pump
Starter
Park Lamp
Fog Lamp
Head Lamp High
Head Lamp Low
Relays
FAN LOW
RELAY
A/CON RELAY
ENGINE MAIN
RELAY
ACC/RAP
RELAY
IGN‐2 RELAY
Usage
Cooling Fan Low
Air Conditioner
Main Power
I/P Fuse Block
Ignition
Misc.
FUSE PULLER Fuse Puller
Cooling Fan High
Usage
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 7‑11 for more information.
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located
under the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more
information.
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Cooling System
6.7 qt
6.3 L
Engine Oil with Filter
4.8 qt
4.5 L
11.9 gal
45.0 L
Transmission, Automatic
6.2 qt
5.87 L
Transmission, Manual
1.9 qt
1.8 L
Wheel Nut Torque
81 lb ft
110 Y
Fuel Tank
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this manual.
Recheck fluid level after filling.
Engine Specifications
Engine
1.6L L4
VIN Code
6
Transmission
Automatic and
Manual
Spark Plug Gap
0.039-0.043 inch (1.0-1.1 mm)
6-93
2 NOTES
6-94
Section 7
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Owner Checks and Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2
7-2
7-3
7-9
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-11
7-13
7-14
7-15
7-1
Maintenance Schedule
The maintenance schedule is for vehicles that:
.
carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits on the Tire and Loading Information label.
See Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑15.
.
are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
.
use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane
on page 6‑6.
Introduction
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
recommended fluids, and lubricants are necessary
to keep this vehicle in good working condition.
Damage caused by failure to follow scheduled
maintenance might not be covered by the vehicle
warranty.
As the vehicle owner, you are responsible for the
scheduled maintenance in this section. We recommend
having your dealer/retailer perform these services.
Proper vehicle maintenance helps to keep the vehicle
in good working condition, improves fuel economy, and
reduces vehicle emissions for better air quality.
Because of all the different ways people use vehicles,
maintenance needs vary. The vehicle might need
more frequent checks and services. Please read the
information under Scheduled Maintenance. To keep
the vehicle in good condition, see your dealer/retailer.
7-2
{ WARNING:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be
dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you can be
seriously injured. Do your own maintenance work
only if you have the required know-how and the
proper tools and equipment for the job. If you
have any doubt, see your dealer/retailer to have a
qualified technician do the work. See Doing Your
Own Service Work on page 6‑5.
At your dealer/retailer, you can be certain that you will
receive the highest level of service available. Your
dealer/retailer has specially trained service technicians,
uses genuine replacement parts, as well as, up to date
tools and equipment to ensure fast and accurate
diagnostics.
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 7‑11 and Maintenance Replacement Parts on
page 7‑13. We recommend the use of genuine parts
from your dealer/retailer.
Rotation of New Tires
To maintain ride, handling, and performance of the
vehicle, it is important that the first rotation service for
new tires be performed when they have 8 000 to
13 000 km (5,000 to 8,000 miles). See Tire Inspection
and Rotation on page 6‑62.
Scheduled Maintenance
When the Change Engine Oil Light
Displays
Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on
page 6‑15. An Emission Control Service.
When the change engine oil light displays, service is
required for the vehicle as soon as possible, within
the next 1 000 km/600 miles. If driving under the best
conditions, the engine oil life system might not indicate
the need for vehicle service for more than a year.
The engine oil and filter must be changed at least
once a year and the oil life system must be reset.
Your dealer/retailer has trained service technicians
who will perform this work and reset the system. If the
engine oil life system is reset accidentally, service the
vehicle within 5 000 km/3,000 miles since the last
service. Reset the oil life system whenever the oil is
changed. See Engine Oil Life System on page 6‑18.
7-3
When the change engine oil light displays, certain
services, checks, and inspections are required.
The services described for Maintenance I should
be performed at every engine oil change. The
services described for Maintenance II should be
performed when:
.
Maintenance I was performed the last time the
engine oil was changed.
.
It has been 10 months or more since the change
engine oil light has displayed or since the last
service.
Maintenance I
.
Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on
page 6‑15. An Emission Control Service.
.
Engine coolant level check. See Engine Coolant
on page 6‑25.
.
Windshield washer fluid level check. See
Windshield Washer Fluid on page 6‑33.
.
Tire inflation check. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 6‑58.
.
Tire wear inspection. See Tire Inspection and
Rotation on page 6‑62.
.
Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 6‑62.
7-4
.
Fluids visual leak check (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). A leak in any system must
be repaired and the fluid level checked.
.
Engine air cleaner filter inspection (vehicles
driven in dusty conditions only). See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 6‑19.
.
Brake system inspection (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first).
Maintenance II
.
Perform all services described in Maintenance I.
.
Steering and suspension inspection. Visual
inspection for damaged, loose, or missing parts
or signs of wear.
.
Engine cooling system inspection. Visual
inspection of hoses, pipes, fittings, and clamps
and replacement, if needed.
.
Windshield wiper blade inspection for wear,
cracking, or contamination and windshield and
wiper blade cleaning, if contaminated. See
Windshield and Wiper Blades on page 6‑83.
Worn or damaged wiper blade replacement.
See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement on
page 6‑50.
.
Body hinges and latches, key lock cylinders,
and trunk lid hinges and latches lubrication.
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 7‑11. More frequent lubrication may be
required when vehicle is exposed to a corrosive
environment. Applying silicone grease on
weatherstrips with a clean cloth makes them
last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.
.
Restraint system component check. See Checking
the Restraint Systems on page 2‑72.
.
Automatic transmission fluid level check
and adding fluid, if needed. See Automatic
Transmission Fluid on page 6‑20.
.
.
Engine air cleaner filter inspection. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 6‑19.
Passenger compartment air filter (if equipped)
replacement (or every 12 months, whichever
occurs first). More frequent replacement may be
required if vehicle is driven regularly under dusty
conditions.
.
PCV system inspection. An Emission Control
Service. The U.S. Environmental Protection
Agency or the California Air Resources Board
has determined that the failure to perform this
maintenance item will not nullify the emission
warranty or limit recall liability prior to the
completion of the vehicle's useful life.
We, however, urge that all recommended
maintenance services be performed at the
indicated intervals and the maintenance be
recorded.
Additional Required Services
At Each Fuel Stop
.
Engine oil level check. See Engine Oil on
page 6‑15.
.
Engine coolant level check. See Engine Coolant
on page 6‑25.
.
Windshield washer fluid level check.
See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 6‑33.
7-5
Once a Month
.
Tire inflation check. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 6‑58.
.
Tire wear inspection. See Tire Inspection and
Rotation on page 6‑62.
Once a Year
.
Starter switch check. See Owner Checks and
Services on page 7‑9.
.
Parking brake and automatic transmission P (Park)
mechanism check. See Owner Checks and
Services on page 7‑9.
.
Automatic transmission shiftlock control system
check. See Owner Checks and Services on
page 7‑9.
.
Ignition transmission lock check. See Owner
Checks and Services on page 7‑9.
.
Engine cooling system and pressure cap pressure
check. Radiator and air conditioning condenser
outside cleaning. See Cooling System on
page 6‑24.
.
Accelerator pedal check for damage, high effort,
or binding. Replace if needed.
7-6
First Engine Oil Change After Every
40 000 km/25,000 Miles
.
Fuel system inspection for damage or leaks.
.
Engine air cleaner filter replacement. See Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter on page 6‑19.
.
Spark plug replacement. Not to exceed
60 000 km/37,500 miles). An Emission Control
Service.
.
Engine accessory drive belt inspection for fraying,
excessive cracks, or obvious damage and
replacement, if needed. An Emission Control
Service.
.
Exhaust system and nearby heat shields
inspection for loose or damaged components.
First Engine Oil Change After Every
80 000 km/50,000 Miles
.
Automatic transmission fluid and filter change
(severe service only) for vehicles mainly driven
in heavy city traffic in hot weather, in hilly or
mountainous terrain, when frequently towing a
trailer, or used for taxi, police, or delivery service.
See Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 6‑20.
.
Power steering pump accessory drive belt
replacement.
.
Evaporative control system inspection. Check all
fuel and vapor lines and hoses for proper hook‐up,
routing, and condition. EVAP vent solenoid valve
replacement. An Emission Control Service.
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined
that the failure to perform this maintenance item
will not nullify the emission warranty or limit
recall liability prior to the completion of the
vehicle's useful life. We, however, urge that all
recommended maintenance services be performed
at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be
recorded.
First Engine Oil Change After Every
160 000 km/100,000 Miles
.
Timing belt replacement.
.
Valve clearance adjustment.
First Engine Oil Change After Every
240 000 km/150,000 Miles
.
Engine cooling system drain, flush, and refill,
cooling system and cap pressure check, and
cleaning of outside of radiator and air conditioning
condenser (or every 5 years, whichever occurs
first). See Engine Coolant on page 6‑25. An
Emission Control Service.
7-7
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Change engine oil and filter. Reset oil life system.
Engine coolant level check.
Windshield washer fluid level check.
Tire inflation pressures check.
Tire wear inspection.
Rotate tires.
Fluids visual leak check.
Engine air cleaner filter inspection (vehicles driven in dusty conditions only).
Brake system inspection.
Steering and suspension inspection.
Engine cooling system inspection.
Windshield wiper blades inspection.
Body components lubrication.
Restraint system components check.
Automatic transmission fluid level check.
Engine air cleaner filter inspection (vehicles not driven in dusty conditions).
Passenger compartment air filter (if equipped) replacement.
PCV system inspection.
7-8
Maintenance I
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Maintenance II
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Owner Checks and Services
Starter Switch Check
{ WARNING:
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or
others could be injured.
3. For automatic transmission vehicles, try to start the
engine in each gear. The starter should work only
in P (Park) or N (Neutral). If the starter works in any
other position, your vehicle needs service.
For manual transmission vehicles, put the shift
lever in Neutral, push the clutch pedal down
halfway, and try to start the engine. The starter
should work only when the clutch pedal is pushed
down all the way to the floor. If the starter works
when the clutch pedal is not pushed all the way
down, your vehicle needs service.
1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough
room around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
brake. See Parking Brake on page 3‑28.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
7-9
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
{ WARNING:
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or
others could be injured.
1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough
room around the vehicle. It should be parked on a
level surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 3‑28.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON/RUN,
but do not start the engine. Without applying the
regular brake, try to move the shift lever out of
P (Park) with normal effort. If the shift lever moves
out of P (Park), contact your dealer/retailer for
service.
7-10
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever position.
.
For automatic transmission vehicles, the ignition
should turn to LOCK/OFF only when the shift lever
is in P (Park).
.
For manual transmission vehicles, the ignition
should turn to LOCK/OFF only when you press the
key release button.
On all vehicles, the ignition key should come out only in
LOCK/OFF.
Turn the steering wheel to the left and to the right.
It should only lock when turned to the right.
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission P (Park) Mechanism
Check
{ WARNING:
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
begin to move. You or others could be injured and
property could be damaged. Make sure there is
room in front of the vehicle in case it begins to
roll. Be ready to apply the regular brake at once
should the vehicle begin to move.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set
the parking brake.
.
.
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number, or specification can be obtained from your
dealer/retailer.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine Oil
Engine oil which meets GM Standard
GM6094M and displays the American
Petroleum Institute Certified for
Gasoline Engines starburst symbol.
To determine the proper viscosity for
your vehicle's engine, see Engine Oil
on page 6‑15.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL®
Engine Coolant
Coolant. See Engine Coolant on
page 6‑25.
To check the parking brake's holding ability:
With the engine running and the transmission in
N (Neutral), slowly remove foot pressure from the
regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held
by the parking brake only.
DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid
Hydraulic Brake
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377967,
System
in Canada 89021320).
To check the P (Park) mechanism's holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to P (Park). Then
release the parking brake followed by the regular
brake.
Power Steering DEXRON®‐VI Automatic Transmission
System
Fluid.
Windshield
Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Washer Solvent
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
7-11
Usage
Automatic
Transmission
Manual
Transmission
Key Lock
Cylinders
Manual
Transmission
Shift Linkage
Chassis
Lubrication
7-12
Fluid/Lubricant
Use only T-IV Automatic Transmission
Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 88900925,
in Canada 22689186).
Manual Transmission Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021806,
in Canada 89021807).
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,
in Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,
in Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Usage
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Latch, Pivots,
Spring
Anchor, and
Release Pawl
Hood and Door
Hinges
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Fluid/Lubricant
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,
in Canada 992723) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,
in Canada 10953518) or
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer.
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Part
GM Part Number
96536696
93185674
96962173
96476119
ACDelco Part Number
A3081C
—
—
—
Driver Side
96476652
—
Passenger Side
96476656
—
Rear
96301840
—
Driver Side
96476652
—
Passenger Side
96476656
—
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Engine Oil Filter
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
Spark Plugs
Wiper Blades - Hatchback
Wiper Blades - Sedan
7-13
Engine Drive Belt Routing
7-14
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Services Performed
7-15
Maintenance Record (cont'd)
Date
7-16
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Services Performed
Maintenance Record (cont'd)
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Services Performed
7-17
Maintenance Record (cont'd)
Date
7-18
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Services Performed
Section 8
Customer Assistance Information
Customer Assistance and Information . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Customer Satisfaction Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Customer Assistance
for Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Customer Assistance Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Roadside Assistance Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Scheduling Service Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Courtesy Transportation Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reporting Safety Defects
to the United States Government . . . . . . . . . . .
Reporting Safety Defects
to the Canadian Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reporting Safety Defects
to General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service Publications Ordering Information . . . . .
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . .
Radio Frequency Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-15
8-15
8-16
8-16
8-17
8-18
8-18
8-19
8-20
8-20
8-1
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your
dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns with
the sales transaction or the operation of the vehicle
will be resolved by the dealer's sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member
of dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service, or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or the
general manager.
8-2
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, in the
U.S., call the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
at 1-800-222-1020. In Canada, call General Motors
of Canada Customer Communication Centre at
1-800-263-3777 (English), or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Have the following
information available to give the Customer Assistance
Representative:
.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is
available from the vehicle registration or title, or
the plate at the top left of the instrument panel
and visible through the windshield.
.
Dealership name and location.
.
Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
When contacting Chevrolet, remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer's facility.
That is why we suggest following Step One first.
STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both General Motors
and your dealer are committed to making sure you are
completely satisfied with your new vehicle. However,
if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the
procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, you can file
with the Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line
Program to enforce your rights.
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus
to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs
or the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Although you may be required to resort to
this informal dispute resolution program prior to filing
a court action, use of the program is free of charge
and your case will generally be heard within 40 days.
If you do not agree with the decision given in your case,
you may reject it and proceed with any other venue for
relief available to you.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the
toll-free telephone number or write them at the following
address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
dr.bbb.org/goauto
This program is available in all 50 states and the
District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage, and other factors. General Motors reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue
its participation in this program.
8-3
STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In the event
that you do not feel your concerns have been
addressed after following the procedure outlined
in Steps 1 and 2, General Motors of Canada Limited
wants you to be aware of its participation in a no-charge
Mediation/Arbitration Program. General Motors of
Canada Limited has committed to binding arbitration
of owner disputes involving factory-related vehicle
service claims. The program provides for the review
of the facts involved by an impartial third party arbiter,
and may include an informal hearing before the arbiter.
The program is designed so that the entire dispute
settlement process, from the time you file your
complaint to the final decision, should be completed
in about 70 days. We believe our impartial program
offers advantages over courts in most jurisdictions
because it is informal, quick, and free of charge.
8-4
For further information concerning eligibility in the
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP), call
toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call the General Motors
Customer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777
(English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or write to:
The Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Your inquiry should be accompanied by the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN).
Online Owner Center
My GM Canada (Canada) — www.gm.ca
Online Owner Center (U.S.) —
www.gmownercenter.com/chevrolet
My GM Canada is a password-protected section
of www.gm.ca where you can save information on
GM vehicles, get personalized offers, and use handy
tools and forms with greater ease.
Information and services customized for your specific
vehicle — all in one convenient place.
.
Digital owner manual, warranty information,
and more
.
Online service and maintenance records
.
Find Chevrolet dealers for service nationwide
.
Exclusive privileges and offers
.
Recall notices for your specific vehicle
.
OnStar® and GM Cardmember Services Earnings
summaries
Other Helpful Links:
Chevrolet — www.chevrolet.com
Chevrolet Merchandise — www.chevymall.com
Help Center — www.chevrolet.com/helpcenter
.
FAQ
.
Contact Us
Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you
will have access to:
.
My Showroom: Find and save information on
vehicles and current offers in your area.
.
My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as
address and phone number for each of your
preferred GM dealers/retailers.
.
My Driveway: Access quick links to parts
and service estimates, check trade-in values,
or schedule a service appointment by adding
the vehicles you own to your driveway profile.
.
My Preferences: Manage your profile and use tools
and forms with greater ease.
To sign up, visit the My GM Canada section within
www.gm.ca.
8-5
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of
hearing, or speech-impaired and who use Text
Telephones (TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY equipment
available at its Customer Assistance Center. Any TTY
user in the U.S. can communicate with Chevrolet by
dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV (2438). (TTY users in Canada
can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
Customer Assistance Offices
Chevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. However, if a customer wishes
to write or e-mail Chevrolet, the letter should be
addressed to:
United States — Customer Assistance
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
Chevrolet.com
1-800-222-1020
1-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephone
devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA (243-8872)
8-6
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Canada — Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
gmcanada.com
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone
devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
Overseas — Customer Assistance
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
Mexico, Central America and Caribbean
Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico
and U.S. Virgin Islands) — Customer
Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
The offer is available for a very limited period of time
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more
details, or to determine your vehicle's eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-9935.
General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY users
call 1-800-263-3830.
Roadside Assistance Program
For U.S. purchased vehicles, call
1‐800‐CHEV‐USA (1‐800‐243‐8872);
(Text telephone (TTY): 1‐888‐889‐2438).
For Canadian purchased vehicles, call 1-800-268-6800.
Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
Calling for Assistance
When calling Roadside Assistance, have the following
information ready:
This program, available to qualified applicants,
can reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of
eligible aftermarket adaptive equipment required
for your vehicle, such as hand controls or a
wheelchair/scooter lift.
.
Your name, home address, and home telephone
number
.
Telephone number of your location
.
Location of the vehicle
8-7
.
Model, year, color, and license plate number of
the vehicle
.
Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle
.
Description of the problem
Services Provided
.
Emergency Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough
fuel for the vehicle to get to the nearest service
station.
.
Lock‐Out Service: Service is provided to unlock
the vehicle if you are locked out. A remote unlock
may be available if you have OnStar®. For security
reasons, the driver must present identification
before this service is given.
.
Emergency Tow From a Public Road or
Highway: Tow to the nearest Chevrolet dealer for
warranty service, or if the vehicle was in a crash
and cannot be driven. Assistance is also given
when the vehicle is stuck in the sand, mud,
or snow.
.
Flat Tire Change: Service is provided to change
a flat tire with the spare tire. The spare tire,
if equipped, must be in good condition and
properly inflated. It is the owner's responsibility
for the repair or replacement of the tire if it is not
covered by the warranty.
.
Battery Jump Start: Service is provided to jump
start a dead battery.
Coverage
Services are provided up to 5 years/100,000 miles
(160 000 km), whichever comes first.
In the U.S., anyone driving the vehicle is covered.
In Canada, a person driving the vehicle without
permission from the owner is not covered.
Roadside Assistance is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Chevrolet and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right to make any changes
or discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at any
time without notification.
Chevrolet and General Motors of Canada Limited
reserve the right to limit services or payment to an
owner or driver if they decide the claims are made too
often, or the same type of claim is made many times.
8-8
Services Not Included in Roadside
Assistance
.
Impound towing caused by violation of any laws.
.
Legal fines.
.
Mounting, dismounting or changing of snow tires,
chains, or other traction devices.
.
Towing or services for vehicles driven on a
non-public road or highway.
Services Specific to Canadian
Purchased Vehicles
.
Fuel delivery: Reimbursement is approximately
$5 Canadian. Diesel fuel delivery may be
restricted. Propane and other fuels are not
provided through this service.
.
Lock-Out Service: Vehicle registration is
required.
.
Trip Routing Service: Detailed maps of North
America are provided when requested either
with the most direct route or the most scenic
route. There is a limit of six requests per year.
Additional travel information is also available.
Allow three weeks for delivery.
.
Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: Must
be over 250 km from where your trip was started to
qualify. General Motors of Canada Limited requires
pre-authorization, original detailed receipts, and a
copy of the repair orders. Once authorization has
been received, the Roadside Assistance advisor
will help you make arrangements and explain how
to receive payment.
.
Alternative Service: If assistance cannot be
provided right away, the Roadside Assistance
advisor may give you permission to get local
emergency road service. You will receive payment,
up to $100, after sending the original receipt to
Roadside Assistance. Mechanical failures may be
covered, however any cost for parts and labor
for repairs not covered by the warranty are the
owner responsibility.
8-9
Scheduling Service Appointments
Courtesy Transportation Program
When your vehicle requires warranty service, contact
your dealer/retailer and request an appointment. By
scheduling a service appointment and advising your
service consultant of your transportation needs, your
dealer/retailer can help minimize your inconvenience.
To enhance your ownership experience, we and our
participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support program for vehicles
with the New Vehicle Limited Warranty (Base Warranty
Coverage period in Canada) and extended powertrain,
and hybrid specific warranty in both the U.S. and
Canada.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can
be scheduled for service, unless, of course, the
problem is safety-related. If it is, please call your
dealership/retailer, let them know this, and ask for
instructions.
If the dealer/retailer requests you to bring the vehicle for
service, you are urged to do so as early in the work day
as possible to allow for the same day repair.
8-10
Several courtesy transportation options are available to
assist in reducing your inconvenience when warranty
repairs are required.
Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled “Warranty
and Owner Assistance Information” furnished with each
new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage
information.
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed
while you wait. However, if you are unable to wait,
GM helps to minimize your inconvenience by providing
several transportation options. Depending on the
circumstances, your dealer can offer you one of
the following:
Shuttle Service
Shuttle service is the preferred means of offering
Courtesy Transportation. Dealers may provide you
with shuttle service to get you to your destination
with minimal interruption of your daily schedule.
This includes one‐way or round trip shuttle service
within reasonable time and distance parameters of
the dealer's area.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs, and
public transportation is used instead of the dealer's
shuttle service, the expense must be supported by
original receipts and can only be up to the maximum
amount allowed by GM for shuttle service. In addition,
for U.S. customers, should you arrange transportation
through a friend or relative, limited reimbursement for
reasonable fuel expenses may be available. Claim
amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported
by original receipts. See your dealer for information
regarding the allowance amounts for reimbursement of
fuel or other transportation costs.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a
courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental
vehicle that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for an
overnight warranty repair. Rental reimbursement will
be limited and must be supported by original receipts.
This requires that you sign and complete a rental
agreement and meet state/provincial, local, and rental
vehicle provider requirements. Requirements vary and
may include minimum age requirements, insurance
coverage, credit card, etc. You are responsible for fuel
usage charges and may also be responsible for taxes,
levies, usage fees, excessive mileage, or rental usage
beyond the completion of the repair.
It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
8-11
Additional Program Information
Collision Parts
All program options, such as shuttle service, may not
be available at every dealer. Please contact your dealer
for specific information about availability. All Courtesy
Transportation arrangements will be administered by
appropriate dealer personnel.
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with
the same materials and construction methods as
the parts with which your vehicle was originally built.
Genuine GM Collision parts are your best choice to
ensure that your vehicle's designed appearance,
durability, and safety are preserved. The use of
Genuine GM parts can help maintain your GM New
Vehicle Warranty.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any
time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein
at its sole discretion.
Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is
damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper equipment and quality
replacement parts. Poorly performed collision repairs
diminish your vehicle's resale value, and safety
performance can be compromised in subsequent
collisions.
8-12
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for
repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles
that were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases,
the parts being recycled are from undamaged sections
of the vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM part,
may be an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle's
originally designed appearance and safety performance,
however, the history of these parts is not known. Such
parts are not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited
Warranty, and any related failures are not covered by
that warranty.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are
made by companies other than GM and may not have
been tested for your vehicle. As a result, these parts
may fit poorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion
problems, and may not perform properly in subsequent
collisions. Aftermarket parts are not covered by your
GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle
failure related to such parts are not covered by that
warranty.
Repair Facility
We recommend that you choose a collision repair
facility that meets your needs before you ever need
collision repairs. Your dealer/retailer may have a
collision repair center with GM-trained technicians and
state of the art equipment, or be able to recommend a
collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians
and comparable equipment.
Insuring Your Vehicle
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage.
There are significant differences in the quality of
coverage afforded by various insurance policy terms.
Many insurance policies provide reduced protection to
your GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage
repairs by using aftermarket collision parts. Some
insurance companies will not specify aftermarket
collision parts. When purchasing insurance, we
recommend that you assure your vehicle will be
repaired with GM original equipment collision parts.
If such insurance coverage is not available from your
current insurance carrier, consider switching to another
insurance carrier.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts.
Read your lease carefully, as you may be charged at
the end of your lease for poor quality repairs.
8-13
If a Crash Occurs
.
Gather the important information you will need from
the other driver. Things like name, address, phone
number, driver's license number, vehicle license
plate, vehicle make, model and model year,
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), insurance
company and policy number, and a general
description of the damage to the other vehicle.
.
If possible, call your insurance company from the
scene of the crash. They will walk you through the
information they will need. If they ask for a police
report, phone or go to the police department
headquarters the next day and you can get a
copy of the report for a nominal fee. In some
states/provinces with “no fault” insurance laws, a
report may not be necessary. This is especially
true if there are no injuries and both vehicles
are driveable.
.
Choose a reputable collision repair facility for
your vehicle. Whether you select a dealer/retailer
or a private collision repair facility to fix the
damage, make sure you are comfortable with
them. Remember, you will have to feel comfortable
with their work for a long time.
.
Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and
make sure you understand what work will be
performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,
ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome
this opportunity.
Here is what to do if you are involved in a crash.
.
Check to make sure that you are all right. If you
are uninjured, make sure that no one else in your
vehicle, or the other vehicle, is injured.
.
If there has been an injury, call emergency
services for help. Do not leave the scene of a
crash until all matters have been taken care of.
Move your vehicle only if its position puts you
in danger or you are instructed to move it by a
police officer.
.
Give only the necessary and requested information
to police and other parties involved in the crash.
Do not discuss your personal condition, mental
frame of mind, or anything unrelated to the crash.
This will help guard against post-crash legal action.
.
If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside
Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program on
page 8‑7 for more information.
.
If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from the
tow truck operator or write down the driver's name,
the service's name, and the phone number.
.
8-14
Remove any valuables from your vehicle before
it is towed away. Make sure this includes your
insurance information and registration if you keep
these items in your vehicle.
Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair
Process
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,
GM recommends that you take an active role in its
repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of
choice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there.
Specify to the facility that any required replacement
collision parts be original equipment parts, either
new Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts.
Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by your
GM vehicle warranty.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must
live with the repair. Depending on your policy limits,
your insurance company may initially value the
repair using aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your
repair professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts.
Remember if your vehicle is leased you may be
obligated to have the vehicle repaired with Genuine
GM parts, even if your insurance coverage does not
pay the full cost.
If another party's insurance company is paying for
the repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair
valuation based on that insurance company's collision
policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits
with that company. In such cases, you can have control
of the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays
within reasonable limits.
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems between
you, your dealer, or General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safecar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA
1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safecar.gov.
8-15
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
Reporting Safety Defects to General
Motors
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your
vehicle has a safety defect, notify Transport Canada
immediately, in addition to notifying General Motors of
Canada Limited. Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or
write to:
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, please notify General Motors.
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 (English) or
1-800-263-7854 (French), or write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
8-16
Service Publications Ordering
Information
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins give additional technical service
information needed to knowledgeably service General
Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin contains
instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of
your vehicle.
Owner Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner manual includes the
Maintenance Schedule for all models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available
for current and past model GM vehicles. To request an
order form, specify year and model name of the vehicle.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the
World Wide Web at: helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
8-17
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy
Your GM vehicle has a number of sophisticated
computers that record information about the vehicle’s
performance and how it is driven. For example, your
vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and control
engine and transmission performance, to monitor the
conditions for airbag deployment and deploy airbags in
a crash and, if so equipped, to provide antilock braking
to help the driver control the vehicle. These modules
may store data to help your dealer/retailer technician
service your vehicle. Some modules may also store
data about how you operate the vehicle, such as rate
of fuel consumption or average speed. These modules
may also retain the owner’s personal preferences, such
as radio pre-sets, seat positions, and temperature
settings.
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an airbag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data related
to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR
in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
.
How various systems in your vehicle were
operating
.
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
belts were buckled/fastened
.
How far, if at all, the driver was pressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal
.
How fast the vehicle was traveling
This data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
8-18
Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if
a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded
by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no
personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash
location) is recorded. However, other parties, such as
law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the
type of personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment
is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other
parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they have access
to the vehicle or the EDR.
GM will not access this data or share it with others
except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee; in
response to an official request of police or similar
government office; as part of GM's defense of litigation
through the discovery process; or, as required by law.
Data that GM collects or receives may also be used for
GM research needs or may be made available to others
for research purposes, where a need is shown and the
data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner.
OnStar®
If your vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to the
OnStar services, please refer to the OnStar Terms and
Conditions for information on data collection and use.
8-19
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID)
RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions
such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system
security, as well as in connection with conveniences
such as key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and
starting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage door
openers. RFID technology in GM vehicles does not use
or record personal information or link with any other GM
system containing personal information.
Radio Frequency Statement
This vehicle has systems that operate on a radio
frequency that comply with Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and with
RSS-210/211 of Industry and Science Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. The device may not cause interference.
2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
other than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
8-20
A
Accessories and Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4
Accessory Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Add-On Electrical Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-86
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-7
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Air Filter, Passenger Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Airbag
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71
Airbag System
How Does an Airbag Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63
Passenger Sensing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 2-70
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . 2-64
When Should an Airbag Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60
Airbags
Passenger Status Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Antenna
Backglass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
Fixed Mast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
Antilock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Appearance Care
Aluminum Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-84
Care of Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-82
Chemical Paint Spotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-85
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-82
Fabric/Carpet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-80
Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-83
Finish Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-85
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic
Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-81
Interior Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-79
Leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-81
Sheet Metal Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-84
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-84
Underbody Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-85
Washing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-82
Weatherstrips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-82
Windshield and Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-83
Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Assistance Program, Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
i-1
Audio System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Audio Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
Radio with CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
Radio with Six-Disc CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
Automatic Transmission
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
B
Backglass Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
Inadvertent Power Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Brake
Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
System Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3
Braking in Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5
Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
i-2
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) . . . . . . . . 6-47
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and Parking
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43, 6-44
License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
Stoplamps, and Back-Up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64
C
California
Perchlorate Materials Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
California Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-7
Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Capacities and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-93
Carbon Monoxide
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Care of
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-82
CD, MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) . . . . . . . . . 6-47
Central Door Unlock System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-69
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Check
Engine Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Checking Things Under the Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Chemical Paint Spotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-85
Child Restraints
Infants and Young Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat
Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Where to Put the Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-87
Cleaning
Aluminum Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-84
Exterior Lamps/Lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-82
Fabric/Carpet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-80
Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-83
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic
Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-81
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-79
Leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-81
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-84
Underbody Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-85
Washing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-82
Weatherstrips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-82
Windshield and Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-83
Climate Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Outlet Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Clutch, Hydraulic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-78
Computer, Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Content Theft-Deterrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3
i-3
Coolant
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Engine Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Courtesy Transportation Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6
Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Customer Information
Service Publications Ordering Information . . . . . . . . 8-17
Customer Satisfaction Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
D
Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Daytime Running Lamps Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
Disc, MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
i-4
Doing Your Own Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5
Dome Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Door
Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Ajar Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Central Door Unlocking System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Rear Door Security Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Driver
Seat Height Adjuster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Driving
At Night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Before a Long Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
In Rain and on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Driving for Better Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
E
EDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Electrical Equipment, Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-86
Electrical System
Engine Compartment Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-89
Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-87
Headlamp Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-87
Instrument Panel Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-88
Power Windows and Other Power Options . . . . . . . 6-87
Windshield Wiper Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-87
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Change Engine Oil Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Check and Service Engine Soon Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Compartment Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Coolant Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Engine Oil
Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Exterior Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
F
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Finish Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-85
Fixed Mast Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-69
Flat Tire, Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-70
Flat Tire, Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-78
Fluid
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
Windshield Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Fog Lamps
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-6
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
California Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Filling a Portable Fuel Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
i-5
Fuel (cont.)
Gasoline Octane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Fuel Economy
Driving for Better . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Fuses
Engine Compartment Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-89
Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-87
Instrument Panel Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-88
Windshield Wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-87
G
Gasoline
Octane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Gauges
Engine Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
i-6
H
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
Headlamp Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-87
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Exterior Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and Parking
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Height Adjuster, Driver Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
Highbeam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Hold Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Hood
Checking Things Under . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
I
L
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Inadvertent Power Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Infants and Young Children, Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Inflation - Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58
Instrument Panel
Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Instrument Panel Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Integrated Trailer Brake Control System (ITBC) . . . . 5-23
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2
Labeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
Lamps
Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
LATCH System for Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Liftgate
Carbon Monoxide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Lights
Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Brake System Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Change Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Daytime Running Lamps Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Exterior Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
J
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
K
Keyless Entry
Remote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
i-7
Lights (cont.)
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Highbeam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Hold Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Up-Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Loading Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Locks
Central Door Unlocking System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Rear Door Security Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8
Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Lumbar
Manual Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
i-8
M
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Maintenance Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Owner Checks and Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Manual Lumbar Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
Manual Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Manual Transmission
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Manual Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Mirrors
Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Outside Convex Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Outside Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Outside Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Outside Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
N
P
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Paint, Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-85
Park
Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Parking
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Over Things That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Parking Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Passenger Compartment Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Passenger Sensing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-7
Perchlorate Materials Requirements, California . . . . . .6-5
Power
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-87
Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Pregnancy, Using Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Program
Courtesy Transportation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Proposition 65 Warning, California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5
O
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Off-Road
Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Oil
Change Engine Oil Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Older Children, Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5
OnStar, Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
OnStar® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Outlet Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Outlets
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Outside
Convex Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Owner Checks and Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-9
Owners, Canadian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
i-9
R
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Radios
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Radio with CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
Radio with Six-Disc CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
Rear Door Security Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7
Rear Seat Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8, 2-10
Rear Window Washer/Wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Recreational Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Reimbursement Program, GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3, 3-4
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-73
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-71
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
Replacement Parts
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
i - 10
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72
Replacing Restraint System Parts After a
Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
Roadside Assistance Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Roof
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Running the Vehicle While Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
S
Safety Belts
Care of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-82
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Safety Belts Are for Everyone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Safety Defects Reporting
Canadian Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Safety Warnings and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3
Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Seats
Driver Seat Height Adjuster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Manual Lumbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Rear Seat Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8, 2-10
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Securing a Child Restraint
Rear Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
Right Front Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4
Accessories and Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Adding Equipment to the Outside of the Vehicle . . . 6-6
Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Engine Soon Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Parts Identification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-86
Publications Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70
Sheet Metal Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-84
Shifting
Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Signals, Turn and Lane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
Spare Tire
Compact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-78
Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-73
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-71
Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-78
Specifications and Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-93
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5
Steering Wheel Controls, Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Storage Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
i - 11
T
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Taillamps
Turn Signal, Sidemarker, Stoplamps, and
Back-Up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6
Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Content Theft-Deterrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Tilt Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51
Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-84
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-69
Changing a Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-70
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-84
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-78
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-69
Inflation - Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58
Inspection and Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62
i - 12
Tires (cont.)
Installing the Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-73
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Pressure Monitor Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60
Pressure Monitor System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59
Removing the Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-73
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-71
Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-78
Terminology and Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55
Uniform Tire Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-68
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-68
When It Is Time for New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64
Towing
Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Towing a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Transmission
Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Fluid, Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Transmission Operation, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Transmission Operation, Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Transportation Program, Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8
Turn and Lane-Change Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
U
Uniform Tire Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66
Up-Shift Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
V
Vehicle
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Parking Your . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Running While Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-86
Service Parts Identification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-86
Ventilation Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
W
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Warnings
Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Safety and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-68
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-68
When It Is Time for New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64
Where to Put the Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
i - 13
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Windshield
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
Windshield (cont.)
Wiper Blades, Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-83
Wiper Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-87
Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Wipers
Rear Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
X
XM Radio Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
i - 14
✍ NOTES
✍ NOTES
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising